Hybrid IP-PBX

PC Programming Manual
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100
Model KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX.

Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.

KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 3.0000 or later

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR Software File Version 3.0000 or later
KX-TDA600: PLMPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later
Introduction
About this Programming Manual
The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the
Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the KX-TDA Maintenance
Console software.
The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections:

Section 1, Overview
Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

Section 2, KX-TDA Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

Serves as reference operating instructions when using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console software
to programme the PBX.

Section 3, Appendix
Provides a list of all related PC programming items for each feature, as Feature Programming
References.

References Found in the PC Programming Manual

Programming Manual References

Related sections of the PC Programming Manual are listed for your reference.

Feature Guide References

The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many
features and facilities. Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your
reference.

Installation Manual References

The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout this manual for your reference.

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of this and other
Hybrid IP-PBX manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• PC Programming Manual References
• Feature Guide References

WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes
unusual noise. These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that
smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre.

2 PC Programming Manual
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
in the United States and/or other countries.
• Intel and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries
in the United States and other countries.
• All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
• Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

NOTES
• The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the
cover of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see How do I confirm the
software version of the PBX or installed cards? in 2.6.1 Frequently Asked Questions
(FAQ).
• Some optional service cards, PTs, and features are not available in some areas. Additionally,
some optional service cards and features are not available for some PBX models. Please consult
your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
• Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without
notice.
In some cases, additional information, including updates to this and other manuals, is included
in the KX-TDA Maintenance Console's Information Before Programming. Install the latest
version of Maintenance Console to view this information.

PC Programming Manual 3
 The KX-TDA30E, KX-TDA30NE, KX-TDA30GR, and KX-TDA30CE are designed to interwork
with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access

The KX-TDA100E/KX-TDA200E, KX-TDA100NE/KX-TDA200NE, KX-TDA100GR/KX-

TDA200GR, and KX-TDA100CE/KX-TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
• ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)

The KX-TDA600E, KX-TDA600NE, KX-TDA600GR, and KX-TDA600CE are designed to

interwork with the:
• Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN basic rate access
• Pan-European Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) using ISDN primary rate access
• ONP 2048 kbit/s digital structured leased lines (D2048S)

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that this
equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio &
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC.
Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for
download by visiting:

http://www.doc.panasonic.de

Contact:
Panasonic Services Europe
a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH
Panasonic Testing Centre
Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

4 PC Programming Manual
Table of Contents
1 Overview ................................................................................................11
1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 12
1.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................... 12
1.1.2 Entering Characters......................................................................................................... 13
1.2 PC Programming ........................................................................................................... 17
1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ............................................................ 17
1.2.2 Password Security ........................................................................................................... 21

2 KX-TDA Maintenance Console Operating Instructions .....................23

2.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 24
2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes ...................................................... 24
2.1.2 Access Levels.................................................................................................................. 27
2.1.3 Software Interface ........................................................................................................... 32
2.1.4 Card Status...................................................................................................................... 35
2.1.5 Display Options ............................................................................................................... 36
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting............................................................................................... 37
2.2 File .................................................................................................................................. 38
2.2.1 File—New ........................................................................................................................ 38
2.2.2 File—Open ...................................................................................................................... 39
2.2.3 File—Close ...................................................................................................................... 40
2.2.4 File—Save ....................................................................................................................... 41
2.2.5 File—Save As .................................................................................................................. 42
2.2.6 File—Exit ......................................................................................................................... 43
2.3 Connect .......................................................................................................................... 44
2.3.1 Connect—RS-232C......................................................................................................... 44
2.3.2 Connect—USB ................................................................................................................ 45
2.3.3 Connect—LAN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) .......................................... 46
2.3.4 Connect—Modem............................................................................................................ 47
2.3.5 Connect—ISDN Remote ................................................................................................. 48
2.3.6 Connect—Disconnect...................................................................................................... 49
2.4 Tool ................................................................................................................................. 50
2.4.1 Tool—SD memory backup............................................................................................... 50
2.4.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration ................................................................................. 51
2.4.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear........................................................................................... 52
2.4.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS....................................................................................................... 53
2.4.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recordings (KX-TDA30 only) ................... 54
2.4.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage (KX-TDA30 only) ................... 55
2.4.7 Tool—Extension List View ............................................................................................... 56
2.4.8 Tool—Import .................................................................................................................... 57
2.4.9 Tool—Export.................................................................................................................... 61
2.4.10 Tool—Programmer Code Change ................................................................................... 62
2.4.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level ............................................. 63
2.4.12 Tool—Languages............................................................................................................. 64
2.4.13 Tool—Profile Setup.......................................................................................................... 65
2.4.14 Tool—Profile Editor.......................................................................................................... 66
2.4.15 Tool—System Data Convert ............................................................................................ 68
2.5 Utility............................................................................................................................... 69

PC Programming Manual 5
 2.5.1 Utility—Diagnosis .............................................................................................................69
2.5.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)......................................................................73
2.5.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC......................................................................78
2.5.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load ...............................................................................79
2.5.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete.............................................................................................80
2.5.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX .......................................................................81
2.5.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC .......................................................................82
2.5.8 Utility—Error Log..............................................................................................................83
2.5.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1
Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30)..............................................................................85
2.5.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Line Trace (for
KX-TDA30) .......................................................................................................................86
2.5.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ..................................................................................87
2.5.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report ....................................................................................88
2.5.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).........89
2.5.14 Utility—CS Information.....................................................................................................90
2.5.15 Utility—PS Information .....................................................................................................91
2.5.16 Utility—Timed Update ......................................................................................................92
2.5.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command .............................................................94
2.5.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information ...................................................................................96
2.6 Help .................................................................................................................................97
2.6.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)..................................................................................97
2.7 [1] Configuration ..........................................................................................................108
2.7.1 [1-1] Slot.........................................................................................................................108
2.7.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary......................................................................................................113
2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property......................................................................................117
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property..............................................................................119
2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port..............................................................................................124
2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command ..................................................................132
2.7.7 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Type View ..................................................................133
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..............................134
2.7.9 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) .........136
2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property ......................................................................................137
2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port ......................................................................................................149
2.7.12 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Port Command ..........................................................................155
2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property.................................................................................156
2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port........................................................................................................169
2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command............................................................................193
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) .................................194
2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ............214
2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ...................215
2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ...................................225
2.7.20 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port—Channel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)........233
2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property .........................................................................................234
2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting........................................................242
2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1............................................................................250
2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2............................................................................256
2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port .........................................................................................................263
2.7.26 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Channel Command.......................................................................272
2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)................273

6 PC Programming Manual
2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ............................... 281
2.7.29 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) .......... 288
2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property....................................................................................... 289
2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port....................................................................................................... 294
2.7.32 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Port Command ........................................................................... 301
2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card Property .................................................................................. 302
2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port .................................................................................................. 304
2.7.35 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port —Port Command ..................................................................... 306
2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ......... 307
2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later) .......................................... 311
2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) .................. 313
2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)....................................... 319
2.7.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ............ 324
2.7.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ........... 326
2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ........ 328
2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only) ......................................................... 330
2.7.44 [1-1] Slot—DPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)........................................................ 333
2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station..................................................................................................... 334
2.7.46 [1-3] Option.................................................................................................................... 338
2.7.47 [1-4] Clock Priority ......................................................................................................... 340
2.8 [2] System .................................................................................................................... 341
2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving................................................................................. 341
2.8.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting............................................. 343
2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM.................................................................................................... 344
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters ................................................................................................ 347
2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table............................................................................................................ 367
2.8.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting .................................................................................... 368
2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table ......................................................................................................... 371
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main ...................................................................................... 373
2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial ............................................................................. 401
2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature ........................................................ 403
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings........................................................................ 407
2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block ............................................................... 422
2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block ................................................................ 423
2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO .................................................................... 424
2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone........................................................ 425
2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others............................................................... 426
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options ..................................................................................................... 428
2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings ....................................................................................... 455
2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ............................................................................... 459
2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ...................... 462
2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later) .................................................................. 463
2.9 [3] Group ...................................................................................................................... 465
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings .............................................................................. 465
2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority .................................................................. 474
2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk Group—Charge Rate ............................................................................... 475
2.9.4 [3-2] User Group............................................................................................................ 476
2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group ................................................................................................. 477

PC Programming Manual 7
 2.9.6 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting ..............................................................................478
2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group .........................................................................................................479
2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting .....................................................................................481
2.9.9 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager..............................................................................482
2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ............................................484
2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table ....................................499
2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous..............................................500
2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member .......................................................502
2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group.......................................................................................504
2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List ...............................................................506
2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings ....................................................................507
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings..........................................................................509
2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List ..................................................510
2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings .................................................................513
2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings ...................................................................522
2.9.21 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List ............................................524
2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group.......................................................................................................525
2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List ...............................................................................527
2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group .............................................................................................528
2.9.25 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List......................................................................529
2.10 [4] Extension.................................................................................................................530
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings ................................................................530
2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate.....................................582
2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND .............................................................................584
2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial ............................................................................588
2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button ......................................................................589
2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy .........................601
2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button ..............................................................................602
2.10.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send ........................................................603
2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only) .........................604
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings .................................................................607
2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate .....................................636
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND............................................................................638
2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button .......................................................................642
2.10.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy ..........................654
2.10.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send .........................................................655
2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)..........................656
2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button ..............................................................................658
2.10.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Flexible button Data Copy..................................671
2.11 [5] Optional Device.......................................................................................................672
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone .............................................................................................................672
2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager .......................................................................................................676
2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System ..........................................................................677
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message........................................................................685
2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only) ............................................................688
2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay........................................................................................................692
2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor .....................................................................................................695
2.12 [6] Feature.....................................................................................................................698
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial ................................................................................................698
2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification.............................................................................................700

8 PC Programming Manual
2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code ................................................................................................... 703
2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone .................................................................................................. 706
2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message.................................................................................................... 707
2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant.................................................................................................................... 708
2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan .......................................................................................................... 710
2.12.8 [6-7] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign.................................................................................... 711
2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge...................................................................................................... 712
2.13 [7] TRS .......................................................................................................................... 721
2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code ......................................................................................................... 721
2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code ..................................................................................................... 722
2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code ............................................................................................. 723
2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial ..................................................................................................... 724
2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous........................................................................................................ 725
2.14 [8] ARS.......................................................................................................................... 727
2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings .................................................................................................... 727
2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number.................................................................................................... 728
2.14.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time................................................................................................. 730
2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting ......................................................................... 731
2.14.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority ............................................................................................. 732
2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier ................................................................................................................... 733
2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception ................................................................................... 736
2.14.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG .................................................................................. 737
2.15 [9] Private Network ...................................................................................................... 738
2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table ............................................................................................................... 738
2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission................................................................................... 741
2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) ....................................................................................... 744
2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table.................................................................................................... 746
2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call.............................................................................................. 748
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings ................................................................................................. 748
2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings .................................................................................... 751
2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table ................................................................................................... 761
2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration.............................................................. 764
2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate ........................................................................ 766
2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table........................................................................................................... 768
2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous...................................................................................................... 772
2.17 [11] Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 774
2.17.1 [11-1] Main..................................................................................................................... 774
2.17.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access..................................................................................... 792
2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)................... 793

3 Appendix..............................................................................................795
3.1 Revision History .......................................................................................................... 796
3.1.1 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3.1xxx........................................................ 796
3.2 Feature Programming References............................................................................. 799

PC Programming Manual 9
10 PC Programming Manual
 Section 1
Overview

This section provides an overview of programming the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 11
1.1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference
for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed
to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and
changing them is referred to as "system programming".
Only one person can perform system programming at a time. Any other users trying to enter
programming mode will be denied access.

Ways to Programme
There are two programming methods:
• PC (Personal Computer) Programming
All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with KX-
TDA Maintenance Console. Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in
Section 1.2 PC Programming. Individual PC programming items are described in KX-TDA
Maintenance Console Operating Instructions.
• PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming
A subset of the features and settings of the PBX can be programmed using a PT. PT
programming is described in the PT Programming Manual.

12 PC Programming Manual
 1.1 Introduction

1.1.2 Entering Characters

The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password
or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX.

Table 1 (Standard)

PC Programming Manual 13
1.1 Introduction

Table 2 (For CE model)

14 PC Programming Manual
 1.1 Introduction

Table 3 (For RU model)

PC Programming Manual 15
1.1 Introduction

Table 4 (For GR model)

16 PC Programming Manual
 1.2 PC Programming

1.2 PC Programming

1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console

System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the
Maintenance Console (KX-TDA30: KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: KX-
TDA Maintenance Console; KX-TDA600: KX-TDA600 Maintenance Console).
This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the
PBX are connected by USB cable. The screenshots shown in the installation procedure are based on
the KX-TDA30 Maintenance Console.

System Requirements
Required Operating System
• Microsoft ® Windows ® 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
Minimum Hardware Requirements
• CPU: 300 MHz Intel ® Celeron ® microprocessor
• HDD: 100 MB of available hard disk space
• RAM: 128 MB of available RAM

PC Programming Manual 17
1.2 PC Programming

Installing the Maintenance Console

Notes
• To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows 2000 Professional or Windows
XP Professional, you must be logged in as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power
Users" group.
• To connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA USB driver must be installed.
Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX-TDA USB driver. When the Hybrid IP-
PBX is first connected to the PC via USB, you may be asked to select the appropriate USB
driver. Browse for and select the KX-TDA USB driver that was installed previously.

1. Copy the setup file of the KX-TDA Maintenance Console to

your PC. (Its icon is shown here, on the left.)
2. Double-click the setup file to run the installer.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions provided by the
installation wizard.

Starting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic

Items (Quick Setup)
When you start the KX-TDA Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and
connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX for the first time after initialisation (with the factory default setting),
Quick Setup will launch automatically. During Quick Setup, you will set up the following basic items:
• Date and Time of the Hybrid IP-PBX. The date and time set to the PC's clock will be used.
• System Password for installer for PC programming.
• Operator and manager settings. Operator extensions for all time modes (day/lunch/break/
night) can be assigned.
• Flexible Numbering plan to Type 1 or Type 2. If Type 1 (with ) is selected, " " must prefix
all feature numbers (except access numbers) when an extension user wants to use a
feature.
• Operator call and Idle Line Access/ARS numbers.
• Remote Maintenance Dial Number. Enter the complete telephone number of the Hybrid IP-
PBX (including the country code). When necessary, this number will be used to access the
Hybrid IP-PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes.

1. Connect the PC to the Hybrid IP-PBX with a USB cable.

2. Start Maintenance Console from the Start menu.

3. "Information Before Programming" appears.

a. Carefully read this important additional information,
which includes updates to this and other manuals.
b. Click [OK] to close this window.

18 PC Programming Manual
 1.2 PC Programming

4. Enter the Installer Level Programmer Code (default:

INSTALLER).
The Programmer Code authorises different programming
levels, and the Quick Setup is only available when you start
the KX-TDA Maintenance Console with the Installer Level
Programmer Code.

Note
There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited
authorisation: Administrator Level (default: ADMIN),
and User Level (default: USER). (→ 1.2.2 Password
Security)
5. a. Click the check box to connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX.
Options will appear as shown here, on the left.
b. Enter the system password for installer (default:
1234).
c. Select "USB", then click [OK].
Note
To connect to the Hybrid IP-PBX via USB, the KX-TDA
USB driver must be installed on the PC, as explained
above in "Installing the Maintenance Console".

6. When country/area data do not match:

a. Click [OK] to replace the country/area data of the
PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to
complete.
b. Follow the procedure described in Section 2.15.1
Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for KX-TDA600), Section
2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 2.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for
KX-TDA30) in the Installation Manual and restart the
PBX.
c. Click "Connect" → "USB" from the menu bar.
d. Repeat step 5 to restart the Maintenance Console.
7. Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard and
assign the basic items.

PC Programming Manual 19
1.2 PC Programming

The programme menu appears. You may now begin

programming the Hybrid IP-PBX.

Notice
1. During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the
system data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the
system is reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost. However, if system
data has been saved to the SD Memory Card, it can be easily restored.
To save the system data to the SD Memory Card, (1) click the "SD Memory Backup" icon
before resetting the PBX or turning off the power, or (2) exit the Maintenance Console so
that the PBX automatically saves the system data.
2. KX-TDA Maintenance Console cannot be used to program the PBX when the PBX is being
powered by the backup batteries (for example, during a power cut). This is to prevent
damage to the SD Memory Card that may occur if the backup battery power runs out while
data is being written to the card.
3. The PC will not perform any shutdown operation, or enter the power-saving system standby
mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX.
To perform either of the operations above, first close the connection to the PBX.

CAUTION
Do not remove the SD Memory Card while power is supplied to the Hybrid IP-PBX. Doing so may
cause the Hybrid IP-PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

20 PC Programming Manual
 1.2 PC Programming

1.2.2 Password Security

To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming
functions of the PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control
the amount of programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:

Password Description Format

System Password for User Used with the user-level programmer code to access 4 – 10
user-level PC programming. The installer can specify characters
which system programming settings are available.
System Password for Used with the administrator-level programmer code to
Administrator access administrator-level PC programming. The
installer can specify which system programming
settings are available.
System Password for Used with the installer-level programmer code to access
Installer installer-level PC programming. All system
programming settings are available.

The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console,
using the 2.4.10 Tool—Programmer Code Change option. For more information about programmer
codes, see 2.1.2 Access Levels.

Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password

1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret,
and inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if
they become known to others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time
that you programme the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for
maximum protection against unauthorised access. For a list of numbers and characters that
can be used in system passwords, see 1.1.2 Entering Characters.
6. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data
into a PC, and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software. If you do
not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and
reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system
data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help of
the Maintenance Console.
However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file,
do not allow unauthorised access to these files.

PC Programming Manual 21
1.2 PC Programming

22 PC Programming Manual
 Section 2
KX-TDA Maintenance Console Operating
Instructions

This section serves as reference operating instructions when

using the KX-TDA Maintenance Console software to program
the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 23
2.1 Introduction

2.1 Introduction

2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes

Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialog box will appear. From here, you can enter any
of the 3 available software modes.
• Initial mode
Initial mode describes the state when Maintenance Console is not connected to the PBX,
and no data files are open. In Initial mode, most options of Maintenance Console are
unavailable. For details, see 2.1.2 Access Levels.
• Batch mode
Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system
data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX. When you connect to the
PBX, the modified data will be uploaded at one time.
• Interactive mode
Interactive mode allows you to directly modify the system data and settings stored in the
PBX's memory from a PC that is connected to the PBX. This mode displays the system data
that is currently being used by the PBX, rather than the system data stored on the SD
memory card. Data can be modified and results displayed in real time.

To start Maintenance Console in Initial mode

1. Enter the relevant programmer code.
2. Click OK.
Maintenance Console will start.

To start Maintenance Console in Batch mode

1. Enter the relevant programmer code.
2. Click OK.
Maintenance Console will start.
3. Select an option from the File menu.
• Select New to create a new system data file.
• Select Open to open an existing system data file.

To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode

1. Enter the relevant programmer code.
2. Select the Connect to PBX check box.
Connection options will be displayed.
• Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only
available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
The Setup button will become unavailable.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be
entered.
• Select the method of connecting to the PBX if you do not want to use a stored profile.

24 PC Programming Manual
 2.1 Introduction

a. Enter the system password for the PBX.

b. Click Setup.
c. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the tables below.
d. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
Maintenance Console will start, and automatically connect to the PBX. If this is the first time that
Maintenance Console has connected to the PBX, and the date and time of the PBX have not yet
been set, the Quick Setup wizard will run. For more details, see Starting the KX-TDA
Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items (Quick Setup).

Connection Settings for RS-232C

Setting Values Explanation

Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned
to the PC's RS-232C interface. Only available
COM ports are displayed.
Baud Rate (bps) 2400bps, 4800bps, Specify the speed of data transmission.
9600bps, 19200bps,
38400bps, 57600bps,
115200bps

Connection Settings for Modem

Setting Values Explanation

Dial Number 1-9, 0, *, # and "," Enter the telephone number to be dialled to
[comma] access the PBX.
Dial Type Auto(Tone), Specify the outgoing dialling method.
Auto(Pulse), Manual If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with
a connected telephone.
Comment – Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned
to the PC's modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Baud Rate 1200bps, 2400bps, Specify the speed of data transmission.
4800bps, 9600bps,
19200bps, 38400bps
Modem Initialise – Enter the modem initialise command, and click
Initialise to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem's
instruction manual.

PC Programming Manual 25
2.1 Introduction

Connection Settings for LAN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Setting Values Explanation

IP Address 1.0.0.0– Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN.
223.255.255.255 Enter the same IP address that was input in IP
Address of 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card
Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only).
Port Number 10000–65535 Specify the port number used to access the
PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that
was input in Maintenance Port Number of
2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).

Connection Setting for ISDN Remote

Setting Values Explanation

Dial Number 30 digits (consisting of Enter the telephone number to be dialled to
1-9, 0, *, # and "," access the PBX.
[comma])

26 PC Programming Manual
 2.1 Introduction

2.1.2 Access Levels

There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer.
Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console.
The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows:

Item Length
User Level Programmer Code 0 – 16 characters
Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters
Installer Level Programmer Code 4 – 16 characters

Access to menu options within the Maintenance Console is restricted depending on the Programmer
Code, and the current software mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software
Modes). When a menu option is limited to certain access levels, this is noted in this manual in the
initial description of that menu option, for example:
"This option is only available at Installer level."
If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading, the menu option is available at all levels.

The target users for each access level are as follows:

Access Level User

User For end users
Administrator For system administrators
Installer For dealers and system installers

The options available in each mode and access level are shown below.
The access levels are abbreviated as follows:
U: User; A: Administrator; I: Installer
A check mark indicates that the menu option is available for that access level.
File

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
New

Open

Close

Save

Save As

Exit

PC Programming Manual 27
2.1 Introduction

Connect

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
RS-232C

USB

LAN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Modem

ISDN Remote

Disconnect

Tool

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
SD memory backup

BRI Automatic Configuration

NDSS Link Data Clear

DXDP All OUS

Simplified Voice Message→Delete All

Recordings (KX-TDA30 only)
Simplified Voice Message→Check Use
Situation (KX-TDA30 only)
Extension List View

Import→Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID

Import→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Import→ARS - Leading Digit

Import→ARS - Except Code

Import→ARS - Routing Plan

Import→Wired Extension (MPR Software File

Version 3.1000 or later)
Import→PS Extension (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
Import→Quick Dial (Basic) (MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)

28 PC Programming Manual
 2.1 Introduction

Tool

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
Import→Quick Dial (MEC) (MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)
Import→PS Registration (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
Export→Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID

Export→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Export→ARS - Leading Digit

Export→ARS - Except Code

Export→ARS - Routing Plan

Export→Wired Extension (MPR Software File

Version 3.1000 or later)
Export→PS Extension (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
Export→Quick Dial (Basic) (MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)
Export→Quick Dial (MEC) (MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)
Export→PS registration (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
Programmer Code Change→User Level

Programmer Code Change→Administrator

Level
Programmer Code Change→Installer Level

Screen Customize→User Level

Screen Customize→Administrator Level

Languages

Profile Setup

System Data Convert

PC Programming Manual 29
2.1 Introduction

Utility

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
Diagnosis

File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)

File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC

SD Card File View and Load

SD Card File Delete

Message File Transfer PC to PBX

Message File Transfer PBX to PC

Error Log

T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600)
E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30)
T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200/KX-TDA600)
E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30)
ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace

Digital Trunk Error Report

IP Extension Statistical Information (KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
CS Information

PS Information

Timed Update

System Reset→Reset by the Command

Flash ROM ID Information

View

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
Toolbar

Status Bar

System Menu

30 PC Programming Manual
 2.1 Introduction

Window

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
Cascade

Tile(Horz)

Tile(Vert)

Help

Menu Option Initial Batch Interactive

U A I U A I U A I
Help

Additional Information

About

PC Programming Manual 31
2.1 Introduction

2.1.3 Software Interface

This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface.

Main Window
The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below:
1 2 3

4 5 6

1. Menu Bar
Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in
programming the PBX.
For details, see Sections 2.2 File to 2.6 Help.

32 PC Programming Manual
 2.1 Introduction

2. Tool Bar
Provides easy access to commonly used software functions.
Two tool bars are provided, as follows:
• File
Contains icons for creating, opening, and saving files. For details, see Sections 2.2.1 File—
New, 2.2.2 File—Open, and 2.2.4 File—Save.
• Tools
Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension
information, and accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.4.1 Tool—SD memory
backup and 2.4.7 Tool—Extension List View.
These menus can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of a menu to move it to another
position. It will automatically snap in to position above, below, to the left, or to the right of the main
window if released there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the tool bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Toolbar from the View menu.

3. Tab Bar
The name of each screen currently open is displayed in a tab in this tab bar. When multiple screens
are open at the same time, click on the tab of a screen to display the options associated with that
screen.

4. System Menu
Provides access to the settings used for programming the PBX, grouped into 11 topics.
For details, see Sections 2.7 [1] Configuration to 2.17 [11] Maintenance.
To display the individual screens within a topic, click the topic heading. It will expand to show the sub-
topics.
• If a sub-topic contains more than one screen, clicking the name of the sub-topic will display
the names of individual screens. Clicking an expanded sub-topic will hide the names of
individual screens.

Double-click on a screen name to open that screen in 6. Main Screen below.

This menu can be positioned freely. Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another
position. It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released
there. Otherwise, it will float separately from the main window.
Whether the system menu is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting System Menu from the
View menu.

5. Status Bar
The status bar displays information on the current state of the Maintenance Console.
Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting Statusbar from the View
menu.

The information displayed is as follows, in order from left to right:

Area Values Description

Program Mode Initial Mode See 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance
Batch Mode xxx Console and Software Modes above.
"xxx" is replaced by the name of the
Interactive Mode
current system data file.
PBX Type Type: TDA30/TDA100/ Displays the type of PBX being
TDA200/TDA600 programmed.

PC Programming Manual 33
2.1 Introduction

Area Values Description

Access Level Level : Displays the current access level,
User determined by the Programmer Code
Administrator entered when starting Maintenance
Installer Console. See 2.1.2 Access Levels for
more information.
PBX System Data Versionxxx-xxx Displays the version number of the
Version system software installed to the PBX.
The first 3 digits are the version number,
and the last 3 digits are the revision
number.
PBX Region Code Regionxxx-xxx Displays the region code assigned to the
PBX and Maintenance Console.
The first 3 digits represent the region
code assigned to the PBX, and the last 3
digits represent the region code
assigned to the Maintenance Console.

6. Main Screen
Displays the screens selected from 4. System Menu above.
For details, see Sections 2.7 [1] Configuration to 2.17 [11] Maintenance.

Standard Buttons and Elements

There are several standard buttons that are displayed on many screens within the Maintenance
Console.

The standard buttons are as follows:

Button Function
OK Implements changes and closes the current screen.
Cancel Abandons changes and returns to the previous screen.
Close Keeps any changes implemented, and closes the current screen.
Apply Implements changes and remains on the same screen.
Refresh Implements changes, updates displayed data, and remains on the
current screen.
Help Displays the relevant help topic for the current screen.

In addition, many screens within the software display a small open folder icon ( ) beside lists of
setting items. Clicking this icon will collapse part of the list, allowing other items to be displayed. The
icon will change to a closed folder ( ).
Clicking the closed folder icon will expand the list again.

34 PC Programming Manual
 2.1 Introduction

2.1.4 Card Status

Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-
service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the
description of each item. Card status changes can only be performed when the software is in
Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes).
• "In service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, and is capable of being
used normally.
• "Out of service" means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX, but has been
temporarily removed from use. This allows settings to be modified or software to be
upgraded.
• "Fault" means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly, or is not functioning correctly.
For more information, see the Installation Manual.
For details about how to change the status of a card, see To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card
(Interactive mode only) on screen 2.7.1 [1-1] Slot.

PC Programming Manual 35
2.1 Introduction

2.1.5 Display Options

The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance
Console.
• View
– Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons.
– Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window.
– System Menu: Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens.
• Window
– Cascade: When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens overlapped, with
the title bars visible.
– Tile(Horz): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens side by side.
– Tile(Vert): When multiple data screens are open, displays all open screens vertically.

36 PC Programming Manual
 2.1 Introduction

2.1.6 Extension Number Setting

Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of
programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard
window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section
explains how to use this Extension Number Setting window.
To select multiple extension numbers, select the type of extension to display, highlight the extensions
you wish to add, then click the Add button. When finished, click OK. Data for the selected extensions
will be added to the first free spaces on the original screen.

Extension Type
Selects the types of extension numbers to display in Extension Numbers & Names List. Multiple
items can be selected. Items that are not available are shown with a grey checkbox.

Value Range
Wired Extension, Portable Station, VM Group(DPT), VM Group(DTMF), ICD Group, PS Ring Group,
OGM(DISA), External Pager, Analogue MODEM, ISDN Remote

Extension Numbers & Names List

Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type, and names. Click entries
to select them, and click the Add button when finished, to add the selected extensions. To deselect
an entry, click it again.

Value Range
Matching extensions

Available Column
Specifies which fields in the original form to add extension data to. For example, if both extension
numbers and names can be entered in the original form, it is possible to specify that extension name
data not be transferred, by deselecting that field here.
To select or deselect a field, click its name.

Value Range
Available fields

Selected Extension List

Displays the extensions that have been selected to be added to member data. To remove an
extension from this list, click it to select it and click Delete.

Value Range
Selected extensions

PC Programming Manual 37
2.2 File

2.2 File

2.2.1 File—New
Creates a new system data file, used to programme the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their
initial or default state.
This option is only available at Installer level.
To upload the file created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 Utility—File
Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

Note
Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file, uploading this file to the PBX will
overwrite all previous settings. Use only when necessary.

To create a new system data file

1. From the File menu, select New.
2. Click the appropriate model number.
3. Select whether an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is
installed or not.
4. Click OK.

38 PC Programming Manual
 2.2 File

2.2.2 File—Open
Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode.

When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked
whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without
converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not
recommended.
For more details regarding file conversion, see 2.4.15 Tool—System Data Convert.

If the file is not supported by the PBX (e.g. a system data file from an incompatible PBX), it will not
be opened. The only files that can be opened are files that were created by the Maintenance Console
for a supported PBX.
To upload a file opened here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 Utility—File
Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

To open a system data file

1. From the File menu, select Open.
The Open dialog box will be displayed.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open.
If the file was created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked if you
want to convert the data.
• Click Yes to convert the data for use with the current version of the Maintenance Console.
Enter a name for the new converted system file.
• Click No to open the file as it is.

PC Programming Manual 39
2.2 File

2.2.3 File—Close
Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to Initial mode.

To close a system data file

• From the File menu, select Close.
If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the
option to save the file.
• Click Yes to save the file.
• Click No to abandon the changes.

40 PC Programming Manual
 2.2 File

2.2.4 File—Save
Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in
Batch mode.
To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 Utility—File
Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

To save a system data file

• From the File menu, select Save.
If the data has never been saved, the Save dialog box will be displayed. For more details, see
2.2.5 File—Save As.

PC Programming Manual 41
2.2 File

2.2.5 File—Save As
Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user.
To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.5.2 Utility—File
Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

To save a system data file with a new name

1. From the File menu, select Save As.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
4. Click Save.
If choosing to overwrite another file, a warning message will be displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite.
• Click No to return to the previous screen.

42 PC Programming Manual
 2.2 File

2.2.6 File—Exit
Closes the Maintenance Console.

To exit the Maintenance Console

• From the File menu, select Exit.
If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed,
giving you the option to save the file.
• Click Yes to save the file.
• Click No to abandon the changes.

PC Programming Manual 43
2.3 Connect

2.3 Connect

2.3.1 Connect—RS-232C
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect
to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to
multiple PBXs and would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.4.13 Tool—
Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.

To connect to the PBX by RS-232C

1. From the Connect menu, select RS-232C.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile. This option is only
available when one or more profiles have been previously stored.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
The Setup button will become unavailable.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be
entered.
• Confirm that the RS-232C radio button is selected if you want to enter the parameters
manually.
a. Click Setup.
b. Specify the settings as required. For more details, see the table below.
c. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
Connection Settings for RS-232C

Setting Values Explanation

Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned
to the PC's RS-232C interface. Only available
COM ports are displayed.
Baud Rate (bps) 2400bps, 4800bps, Specify the speed of data transmission.
9600bps, 19200bps,
38400bps, 57600bps,
115200bps

44 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Connect

2.3.2 Connect—USB
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB
Module) attached to a DPT.

To connect to the PBX by USB

1. From the Connect menu, select USB.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be
entered.
• Select the USB radio button if you do not want to use a profile.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 45
2.3 Connect

2.3.3 Connect—LAN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX.
A CTI-LINK card must be installed and the IP address of the PBX set to use this feature. For more
details, see 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only).
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect
to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to
multiple PBXs and would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.4.13 Tool—
Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.

To connect to the PBX by LAN

1. From the Connect menu, select LAN.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
The Setup button will become unavailable.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be
entered.
• Select the LAN radio button if you want to enter parameters manually.
a. Click Setup.
b. Modify the connection parameters as required. For more details, see the table below.
c. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
Connection Settings for LAN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Setting Values Explanation

IP Address 1.0.0.0– Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN.
223.255.255.255 Enter the same IP address that was input in IP
Address of 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card
Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only).
Port Number 10000–65535 Specify the port number used to access the
PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that
was input in Maintenance Port Number of
2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).

46 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Connect

2.3.4 Connect—Modem
Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem.
To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—
Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 2.17.1 [11-1] Main.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect
to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to
multiple PBXs and would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.4.13 Tool—
Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.

To connect to the PBX by Modem

1. From the Connect menu, select Modem.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
The Setup button will become unavailable.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be
entered.
• Confirm that the Modem radio button is selected if you want to enter parameters manually.
a. Click Setup.
b. Modify the connection parameters as required. For more details, see the table below.
c. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
Connection Settings for Modem

Setting Values Description

Dial Number 1-9, 0, *, # and "," Enter the telephone number to be dialled to
[comma] access the PBX.
Dial Type Auto(Tone), Specify the outgoing dialling method.
Auto(Pulse), Manual If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with
a connected telephone.
Comment – Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned
to the PC's modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Baud Rate 1200bps, 2400bps, Specify the speed of data transmission.
4800bps, 9600bps,
19200bps, 38400bps
Modem Initialise – Enter the modem initialise command, and click
Initialise to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem's
instruction manual.

PC Programming Manual 47
2.3 Connect

2.3.5 Connect—ISDN Remote

Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode using the ISDN TA interface of the PBX.
This method is only available when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI 2.0 is used, and
Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number of the 2.17.1 [11-1] Main screen is set.
This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect
to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to
multiple PBXs and would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.4.13 Tool—
Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.

To connect to the PBX by ISDN Remote

1. From the Connect menu, select ISDN Remote.
The Login window will be displayed.
2. Select a connection option.
• Select the Use profile check box if you want to use a pre-saved profile.
a. Select the profile to use from the drop-down list.
The Setup button will become unavailable.
b. If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile, enter it.
If the system password has been stored with the selected profile, it does not need to be
entered.
• Confirm that the ISDN Remote radio button is selected if you want to enter parameters
manually.
a. Click Setup.
b. Modify the connection parameters as required. For more details, see the table below.
c. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
Connection Setting for ISDN Remote

Setting Values Explanation

Dial Number 30 digits (consisting of Enter the telephone number to be dialled to
1-9, 0, *, # and "," access the PBX.
[comma])

48 PC Programming Manual
 2.3 Connect

2.3.6 Connect—Disconnect
Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen,
system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.4.1 Tool—SD
memory backup).

To disconnect
1. From the Connect menu, select Disconnect.
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.

PC Programming Manual 49
2.4 Tool

2.4 Tool

2.4.1 Tool—SD memory backup

Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is
chosen.

To back up system data

• From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup.

50 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

2.4.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration

Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI
Mode, on the Network tab of the 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port screen.

Notes
• Only one card can be configured at a time.
• To use this tool, the card to be configured must be pre-set to OUS status. For more details,
see 2.1.4 Card Status.
When configuration is complete, the card is automatically returned to INS status.
• At any time on this screen, you can click Close to return to the previous screen without
saving.

To configure the BRI card

1. From the Tool menu, select BRI Automatic Configuration.
2. Select the BRI card to configure by clicking the Check cell and setting it to ON (blue).
3. Click OK.
The ports associated with the selected BRI card will be displayed on a new screen.
4. Enter suitable Subscriber Numbers for the ports you want to configure.
Only ports whose Subscriber Numbers have been entered will be configured.
5. Click Execute.
The results of configuration will be displayed.
6. Click Data Apply to save these results to the BRI card.

PC Programming Manual 51
2.4 Tool

2.4.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear

Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension
and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs
in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.

To clear the NDSS Link Data

• From the Tool menu, select NDSS Link Data Clear.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click Yes to clear the data.
• Click No to keep the data, and close the screen.

52 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

2.4.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS

Sets the status of all DXDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously.

To set all DXDP ports to OUS.

1. From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS.
2. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 53
2.4 Tool

2.4.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recordings

(KX-TDA30 only)
Deletes all voice messages recorded to SVM cards installed in the PBX.

To delete voice messages

1. From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recordings.
2. Select the card from which to delete messages.
3. Click OK.

54 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

2.4.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage

(KX-TDA30 only)
Displays information on the voice messages stored in SVM cards installed in the PBX. For each
message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed.

To view SVM message status

• From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage.

PC Programming Manual 55
2.4 Tool

2.4.7 Tool—Extension List View

Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types.

The types that can be displayed are as follows:

Type Detail
Intercom Wired Extension
VM Voice Mail
Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station)
ICDG Incoming Call Distribution Group
WG PS Ring Group
VM (DPT) VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) VM (DTMF) Group
Pager External Pager
MODEM Analogue Modem
ISDN Remote ISDN Modem
OGM (DISA) DISA
DSS DSS Console
DPT-I/F CS PT-interface CS
SVM SVM Card

To view extension information

• From the Tool menu, select Extension List View.

56 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

2.4.8 Tool—Import
Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.
The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX
using the Export tool (see 2.4.9 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files. Unsupported
file types cannot be opened. PS Registration files are saved with the extension ".kex" by default.
For all tables except ARS - Routing Plan and PS Registration, it is possible to edit the CSV file
directly using an appropriate editor, before importing.

The types of data that can be imported using this tool, and the matching destination fields, are as
follows:
Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID

Data Type Import Destination

System Speed Dialling Location
Number
Name Name
CO Line Access Number + Dial
Telephone Number
CLI Destination CLI Destination

Related programming: 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table

Data Type Import Destination

Location Location
DDI/DID Number Dial In Number
DDI/DID Name Dial In Name
DDI/DID Destination-Day Destination-Day
DDI/DID Destination-Lunch Destination-Lunch
DDI/DID Destination-Break Destination-Break
DDI/DID Destination-Night Destination-Night
Tenant Number Tenant Number
VM Trunk Group No. Group Number for VPS
Answer
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Day CLI Ring - Day
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Lunch CLI Ring - Lunch
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Break CLI Ring - Break
CLI Ring for DDI/DID-Night CLI Ring - Night

Related programming: 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

PC Programming Manual 57
2.4 Tool

ARS - Leading Digit

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Leading Number Leading Digit
Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits
Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number

Related programming: 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

ARS - Except Code

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Leading Number Exception Exception Code

Related programming: 2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception

ARS - Routing Plan

Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 2.14.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time

Wired Extension (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location (selected
automatically)
Extension Number Extension Number
(selected automatically)
Extension Name Extension Name (selected
automatically)

Related programming: 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PS Extension (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location (selected
automatically)
Extension Number Extension Number
(selected automatically)

58 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

PS Extension (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Data Type Import Destination

Extension Name Extension Name (selected
automatically)

Related programming: 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Quick Dial (Basic) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Dial Dial
Phone Number Phone Number

Related programming: 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Quick Dial (MEC) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Data Type Import Destination

No. Location
Dial Dial
Phone Number Phone Number

Related programming: 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

PS Registration (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Data Type Import Destination

(no fields to select) (no fields to select)

Related programming: 2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

To import system data

1. From the Tool menu, point to Import, and then click the type of data to import.
2. Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open.
3. Select the file.
4. Click Open to open the file.
If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-
TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table to which to import
the data (KX-TDA30: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600: system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
6. If required, select import fields.
When import fields can be selected, the selection screen is displayed automatically. Matching
origin and destination fields are entered by default.

PC Programming Manual 59
2.4 Tool

• To change the destination for an import field, select the preferred field from the drop-
down list.
• To not import a field, select the blank option from the drop-down list.
7. Click OK to perform the import operation.
Depending on the type of data imported, the relevant programming screen may be displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to complete the import operation.
If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import
destination, an error message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and
the operation will be cancelled.
This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but
the data being imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked
together.

60 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

2.4.9 Tool—Export
Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import
tool (see 2.4.8 Tool—Import) to update another PBX.
Except for ARS - Routing Plan and PS Registration, tables are exported as comma-separated
value (CSV) files.
Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

Note
The separator used in CSV files created using the Export tool is decided by the unit specified in
List Separator, in the Windows Regional Options Control Panel.

To export system data

1. From the Tool menu, point to Export, and then click the type of data to export.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
3. Enter a file name.
4. Click Save to display the Export window.
5. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-
TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table from which to
export the data (KX-TDA30: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600: system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
A list of field names that can be exported will be displayed.
6. Click the check box beside the name of each field that you want to export.
7. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 61
2.4 Tool

2.4.10 Tool—Programmer Code Change

Allows you to change the code used to log on to the Maintenance Console at startup.
This option is only available at Installer level.
It is possible to change the codes used for your level and below, but not codes used for higher levels.
Only codes that you can change will be displayed in the Programmer Code Change menu. For an
explanation of the Programmer Code levels, see 2.1.2 Access Levels.
The current code is displayed when the Programmer Code Change window opens.

The required length of each level's code is as follows:

Access Level Programmer Code Length

User 0 – 16 characters
Administrator 4 – 16 characters
Installer 4 – 16 characters

To change a code
1. From the Tool menu, select Programmer Code Change.
2. Enter the new Programmer Code in the first box.
Make sure that the new code is the required length, and contains only ASCII characters.
3. Re-enter the same code in the second box.
4. Click OK to activate the new code.

62 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

2.4.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level

Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and
Administrator levels.
This option is only available at Installer level.
Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the
menu bar to users with the level of access being edited.

To modify displayed screens

1. From the Tool menu, point to Screen Customize, and then click the access level to modify.
2. Select the items that you want to have displayed.
• Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed.
• Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 63
2.4 Tool

2.4.12 Tool—Languages
Allows you to specify the display language for all menus, screens, tools and utilities of Maintenance
Console.

To modify displayed screens

• From the Tool menu, point to Languages, and then click the language you want to use for
Maintenance Console.

64 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

2.4.13 Tool—Profile Setup

Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting
the connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection
settings for several PBXs. Then, when you wish to connect to a specific PBX, you can simply choose
that PBX's profile from the list.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function
New Opens the 2.4.14 Tool—Profile Editor window to create a new profile.
Edit When an existing profile is selected, opens the 2.4.14 Tool—Profile
Editor window to modify the parameters of that profile.
Delete When an existing profile is selected, deletes that profile. A confirmation
message will be displayed.
Close Closes the current window.

To create or edit a profile

• From the Tool menu, select Profile Setup.

PC Programming Manual 65
2.4 Tool

2.4.14 Tool—Profile Editor

Allows the creation and editing of profiles of settings required to connect the PC to the PBX by RS-
232C, LAN, modem, ISDN remote or USB.

Note
When a profile is edited and saved with a new name, the original profile is not deleted.

The settings are as follows:

Setting Description
Profile Name Enter a name used to identify this set of PBX connection settings. This
name must not be the same as another profile name.
System Password Enter the password to log on to the target PBX, if required.
Default Select the default connection method.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function
Save Saves the current profile information.
Cancel Closes the current screen without saving the profile information.

To create or edit a profile

1. From the Tool menu, select Profile Setup.
The Profile Setup window (2.4.13 Tool—Profile Setup) will be displayed.
2. Click New or Edit.
The Profile Editor window will be displayed.
3. Enter a name for this profile.
4. Enter the system password used to connect to the PBX.
5. Select the default connection method.
6. Enter the detailed connection method settings as required. See the tables below for more
information.
Note that it is possible to select connection methods other than the default method when using
this profile to connect to the PBX. For this reason, you can choose to input settings for multiple
connection methods in a single profile. Click the tabs to view the settings for each type of
connection.
7. Click Save.

Connection Settings for RS-232C

Setting Values Explanation

Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned
to the PC's RS-232C interface. Only available
COM ports are displayed.

66 PC Programming Manual
 2.4 Tool

Connection Settings for RS-232C

Setting Values Explanation

Baud Rate (bps) 2400bps, 4800bps, Specify the speed of data transmission.
9600bps, 19200bps,
38400bps, 57600bps,
115200bps

Connection Settings for Modem

Setting Values Description

Dial Number 1-9, 0, *, # and "," Enter the telephone number to be dialled to
[comma] access the PBX.
Dial Type Auto(Tone), Specify the outgoing dialling method.
Auto(Pulse), Manual If Manual is chosen, dialling must be done with
a connected telephone.
Comment – Enter a comment to identify the set of values.
Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned
to the PC's modem interface.
Only available COM ports will be displayed.
Baud Rate 1200bps, 2400bps, Specify the speed of data transmission.
4800bps, 9600bps,
19200bps, 38400bps
Modem Initialise – Enter the modem initialise command, and click
Initialise to send the command to the modem.
For more details, refer to your modem's
instruction manual.

Connection Settings for LAN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Setting Values Explanation

IP Address 1.0.0.0– Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN.
223.255.255.255 Enter the same IP address that was input in IP
Address of 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card
Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only).
Port Number 10000–65535 Specify the port number used to access the
PBX via LAN. Enter the same port number that
was input in Maintenance Port Number of
2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).

Connection Setting for ISDN Remote

Setting Values Explanation

Dial Number 30 digits (consisting of Enter the telephone number to be dialled to
1-9, 0, *, # and "," access the PBX.
[comma])

PC Programming Manual 67
2.4 Tool

2.4.15 Tool—System Data Convert

Converts system data (DSYS/DSSYS) files created with a previous version of the Maintenance
Console for use with the currently loaded version.
This option is only available when the Maintenance Console is in Initial mode.
It is necessary to convert system data to use it with a version of the Maintenance Console other than
the version that saved that data. This is because each new version of the Maintenance Console adds
new options and settings that are not saved by older versions.

Note
When upgrading from a system without an MEC card installed to a system with an MEC card
installed, after converting the system data using this utility, it is necessary to pre-install the MEC
card by setting Memory Expansion Card: on the 2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property screen
to PreInstall.

To convert system data

1. From the Tool menu, select System Data Convert.
2. In Source File Name, enter the file to convert.
• Enter the path and name of the file in the text field.
• Click the "…" button to navigate to and select the target file.
3. In Destination File Name, enter the desired name for the converted file.
The destination file name or location must be different from the source file name.
If another file with the same name already exists in that location, it will be automatically
overwritten.
• Enter the path and name of the file in the text field.
If you do not specify a path, the new file will be saved in the same directory as the source file.
• Click the "…" button to navigate to and select the target file.
4. Click OK.
If the convert operation was successful, a message will be displayed.
5. Click OK.

68 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5 Utility

2.5.1 Utility—Diagnosis
Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems. There are
2 types of test, Card Test and Pair Port Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).
If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. Test results
can be saved as a TXT-format (text) file.
When testing is complete, any cards that were set to OUS status must be returned to INS status if
they are to be used again.

Card Test
Tests the relevant functions of a card to ensure that it is operating correctly. The tests carried out vary
according to the type of card being tested.

The tests that are performed on each card are as follows:

A check mark indicates that the test is available for that card.

KX-TDA30

EXT-CID
IP-GW4

ECHO8
DHLC4

MSG2
LCOT
DLC4
DLC8
SLC4
SLC8

DID3

DPH
BRI

E1

Local loop back diagnosis

Card CT Bus diagnosis

DTMF Receive test port

MSG Card DTMF receive test

EXT-CID path test

DSP DTMF generator/receiver

diagnosis
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis

Framer IC alarm signal

detection diagnosis
Framer IC error detection
diagnosis

PC Programming Manual 69
2.5 Utility

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

SLC16/MSLC16/ESLC16/EMSLC16

IP-GW4 (TDA0484)
LCOT/ELCOT

CTI-LINK

IP-GW16
IP-EXT
DHLC

SLC8

CSIF

E&M
OPB
DLC

BRI

DID
PRI
E1
T1
Local loop back diagnosis

Card CT Bus diagnosis (KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
DTMF Receive test port

PT loop back diagnosis

Caller ID Card DTMF Sending

Out Diagnosis
DSP DTMF generator/receiver
diagnosis
DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis

Framer IC alarm signal

detection diagnosis
Framer IC error detection
diagnosis
CS-INF loop back diagnosis

Super frame synchronization

diagnosis
Caller ID card loop back
diagnosis
Extension mode setting test

CTI-LINK loop back diagnosis

IP-GW H.323 call simulate

diagnosis
LAN loop back diagnosis

To perform a card test

1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.

70 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
With the KX-TDA30, to perform the EXT-CID path test, set the status of both the EXT-CID card
and the card in slot 1 to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Card Test option.
A new window will be displayed.
5. Click OK to perform the test(s).
The error report will be displayed. When all tests are completed, the words "Test End!" will be
shown on the last line of the output.
6. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

Pair Port Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Tests the combination of an extension port and trunk port to ensure that communication with the trunk
port can be carried out successfully.
The pair port test can be carried out using one LCOT or ELCOT card and one DHLC, SLC8, SLC16,
MSLC16, ESLC16 or EMSLC16 card.

Note
With the KX-TDA600, the pair of cards to be used for the pair port tests must be installed within
the same shelf.

The tests that are performed are as follows:

Line current OFF (Ext—>CO) Line current from extension to trunk turns off.
Line current ON (Ext—>CO) Line current from extension to trunk turns on.
Off hook detection (CO—>Ext) Off-hook generation/detection from trunk to extension
DTMF detection (CO—>Ext) DTMF generation/detection from trunk to extension
DP detection (CO—>Ext) DP generation/detection from trunk to extension
BELL detection (Ext—>CO) BELL generation/detection from extension to trunk
Speech path (Ext—>CO) Speech path from extension to trunk
Speech path (CO—>Ext) Speech path from trunk to extension

To perform a pair port test

1. From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis.
2. Click on the Status cell of the extension card to be tested, and set it to "OUS".
3. Click on the cell showing the card type.
A new window will be displayed.
4. Select the Pair Port Test option.

PC Programming Manual 71
2.5 Utility

A new window will be displayed. The card you selected in Step 3 will be shown in the Extension
Line Slot No. drop-down list.
5. From the CO Line Slot No. drop-down list, select the slot number of the trunk card you want to
test.
6. From the CO Line Port No. drop-down list, select the port number of the trunk you want to test.
7. Click OK.
The error report will be displayed.
8. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen.

72 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)

Copies PBX system files (program files and data files) from the connected PC to the SD memory card
installed in the PBX. Pre-existing files on the SD memory card are overwritten.
This option is only available at Installer level.

Two types of files can be copied using this tool:

• Program files: These contain the programs used to operate cards within the PBX and CSs,
acting as on-board drivers.
• Data files: These contain the initial configuration data for individual cards and settings.
Not all files that are copied using this tool are automatically made active. To install new program files
or main system data to the PBX, use the System Reset—Reset by the Command utility (see 2.5.17
Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command) for PMPR/PSMPR/PLMPR and DSYS/DSSYS/
DLSYS files, and the SD Card File View and Load utility (see 2.5.4 Utility—SD Card File View and
Load) for all other files.

The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things: whether the file contains
supported data, and which system component the file applies to.
Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be
transferred. Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message.

The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows:

Main Program
KX-TDA30

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

PSMPR MPR
PSMPR_S MPR*

*: PSMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as

"PSMPR_S".

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

PMPR MPR
PMPR_SUB MPR*

*: PMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as

"PMPR_SUB".

KX-TDA600

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

PLMPR EMPR

PC Programming Manual 73
2.5 Utility

KX-TDA600

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

PLMPR_S EMPR*

*: PLMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as

"PLMPR_S".

LPR Program
KX-TDA30

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

PE1 E1

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

PCSINF CSIF
PDHLC DHLC8/DLC8/DLC16
PSLC SLC8
PT1 T1
PE1 E1
PEM E&M
PBRI BRI
PIPGW IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
PIPGWH IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
PIPGW16 IP-GW16
PPRI23 PRI23
PPRI30 PRI30
POPB3 OPB
PCTILINK CTI-LINK
PDID DID8
PIPEXT IP-EXT16
PVOIPEX IP-EXT16
PESLC ESLC16/EMSLC16 (KX-TDA600 only)
PELCOT ELCOT (KX-TDA600 only)
PEECHO EECHO (KX-TDA600 only)
PBUSS BUS-S (KX-TDA600 only)

74 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

CS Program
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit
PCSDECT CS for DECT Portable Station (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
PDCSDECT CS for DECT Portable Station
PCS24G CS for 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
PDCS24G CS for 2.4 GHz Portable Station

System Data
KX-TDA30

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

DSSYS MPR
DSSYS_S MPR*

*: DSSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DSSYS_S".

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

DSYS MPR
DSYS_SUB MPR*

*: DSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DSYS_SUB".

KX-TDA600

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

DLSYS EMPR
DLSYS_S EMPR*

*: DLSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DLSYS_S".

Language Data
Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Unit
DLNG0–DLNG5 PT
DVMLNG1–DVMLNG5 VPS (Display Guidance data)

PC Programming Manual 75
2.5 Utility

Default Value Data

KX-TDA30

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

DSINI MPR
DSIDHLC DHLC4 (Pre-installed super hybrid ports)
DSISLCLC SLC4/SLC8
DSIDLC DLC4/DLC8
DSIBRI BRI1/BRI2
DSILCOT LCOT2/LCOT4
DSIEIO DPH2/DPH4
DSIIPGW IP-GW4
DSIDID DID3
DSIE1 E1

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

DINI MPR
DIDHLC DHLC8
DISLC SLC8
DIDLC DLC8/DLC16
DIBRI BRI
DICSINF CSIF
DILCOT LCOT8/LCOT16
DIT1 T1
DIE1 E1
DIEM E&M
DIOPB3 OPB3
DICTILIN CTI-LINK
DIEIO EIO
DIIPGW1 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
DIIPGW2 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
DIIPGW3 IP-GW16
DIPRI23 PRI23
DIPRI30 PRI30
DISLCLC SLC16

76 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

DIDID DID8
DIIPEXT IP-EXT16

KX-TDA600

Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card

DLINI EMPR
DLIDHLC DHLC8
DLISLC SLC8, EMSLC16, ESLC16
DLIDLC DLC8/DLC16
DLIBRI BRI
DLICSINF CSIF
DLILCOT ELCOT16
DLIT1 T1
DLIE1 E1
DLIEM E&M
DLIOPB3 OPB3
DLICTILI CTI-LINK
DLIEIO EIO
DLIIPGW1 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480)
DLIIPGW2 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484)
DLIIPGW3 IP-GW16
DLIPRI23 PRI23
DLIPRI30 PRI30
DLIDID DID8
DLIIPEXT IP-EXT16

To transfer files to the SD memory card

1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).
The dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the file to upload.
A window showing the upload progress will be displayed.
While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according
to the header information.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
3. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 77
2.5 Utility

2.5.3 Utility—File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC

Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC.
This option is only available at Installer level.

The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows:

File Name File Type

DSSYS (KX-TDA30) System Data
DSYS (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)
DLSYS (KX-TDA600)
$SYSERR Error Data
$SYSERR1–$SYSERR9
DSKEYSD (KX-TDA30) Feature Restriction
DKEYSD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)
DLKEYSD (KX-TDA600)

Downloading the DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS system data file allows you to make a backup of the
configuration of the PBX.
The error data files are snapshots of the configuration of the PBX taken automatically when a major
error causes a system reset. They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem.
If there is only one error data file, its name will be $SYSERR. If there is more than one file, the files
will be numbered in chronological order, up to a maximum of 9 files.

To transfer files to the PC

1. From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PBX (SD Card) to PC.
2. Select the file to download from the list of files on the SD memory card.
Only the files listed in the table above can be downloaded. Selecting any other file will cause an
error message to be displayed.
3. Click Transfer.
The Save dialog box will be displayed.
4. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file.
5. Enter a file name.
6. Click Save.
A window showing the download progress will be displayed.
A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete.
7. Click OK.

78 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load

Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programs stored in LPR
cards (cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs).
This option is only available at Installer level.
To update the program stored in an LPR card, the card must first be set to out of service (OUS). To
update the program stored in a CS, the port of the card (CSIF/DHLC/DLC) that the CS is attached to
must be set to OUS, but the card itself must be set to in service (INS). Only cards that are in the
correct status will be displayed.
The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed.

To view and load files on the SD memory card

1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File View and Load.
2. Click on the name of the file whose information you want to view.
Only files containing program data (whose filenames start with "P") can be selected.
3. Click Detail.
The Detail screen will be displayed. Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is
displayed on the left.
4. From the Card drop-down list on the right, select the card(s) whose software you want to update.
• To update a specific card or port:
• LPR cards: select the slot number and card name.
• CSs: select the slot number and card name, and then select the related CS port from
the drop-down list directly below.
• To update all matching cards simultaneously:
• Select "ALL".
5. Click View to update the displayed header information of the selected files.
The file with the higher File Version and File Revision numbers is newer.
6. Click Load to update the file stored on the PBX.
When the update is finished, a message will be displayed.
7. Click OK.
The display will return to the Detail screen.

PC Programming Manual 79
2.5 Utility

2.5.5 Utility—SD Card File Delete

Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility:
KX-TDA30: PSMPR, DSSYS, DSKEYSD
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR, DSYS, DKEYSD
KX-TDA600: PLMPR, DLSYS, DLKEYSD

To delete files from the SD memory card

1. From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.
2. Click on the file to be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
4. Click OK.
The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen.

80 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the selected MSG card.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG card is installed. For
the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS
status. For the KX-TDA30, the MSG card must be set to OUS status.
Files are stored on the MSG card in the location specified by the file's header information. Uploaded
files are automatically renamed as necessary. If this location already contains an OGM, it will be
overwritten by the newly uploaded message.

To transfer OGMs to an MSG card

1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PC to PBX.
2. Select the target MSG card from the drop-down list, and click OK.
The Open dialog box will be displayed.
3. Select the message files to upload.
It is possible to select multiple files.
4. Click OK.
The files will be uploaded. Files that do not contain message data will be ignored.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 81
2.5 Utility

2.5.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the MSG card to the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG card is installed. For
the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS
status. For the KX-TDA30, the MSG card must be set to OUS status.

To transfer OGMs to the PC

1. From the Utility menu, select Message File Transfer PBX to PC.
2. From the upper drop-down list, select the target MSG card.
3. From the lower drop-down list, select the messages to transfer.
• To transfer a certain message, select the number of that message.
• To transfer all messages at once, select "ALL".
The Save dialog box will be displayed.
4. Enter a file name.
5. Click Save.
6. Click OK.
When you choose to transfer all messages, each message is saved as an individual file, with a
number appended to the file name corresponding to that message's location on the MSG card.
When complete, the display will return to the main screen.

82 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.8 Utility—Error Log

Collects and displays system error information.
Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC
collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message.

The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows:

Button Function
Cancel Closes the Error Log screen without saving.
Capture Saves the currently displayed Error Log information as a text file.
Minor Displays minor errors, which affect only a certain part of system
operation.
Major Displays major errors, which affect operation of the whole system,
or result in system failure.
Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and
the PBX.
Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions.

The items displayed on screen are as follows:

Item Description
Index The ordinal number assigned to an error record in the current log.
Date The date of the error detection.
Time The time of the error detection.
Error Code The 3-digit error code assigned by the PBX.

PC Programming Manual 83
2.5 Utility

Item Description
Sub Code The 5-digit sub code of the relevant hardware. (XYYZZ)
• X: Shelf number
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1
KX-TDA600:
• 1: Basic Shelf
• 2: Expansion Shelf 1
• 3: Expansion Shelf 2
• 4: Expansion Shelf 3
• YY: Slot number
KX-TDA30: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01: Fixed slot, 02 to
04: Free slot type A, 05 to 07: Free slot type B, 08 to 11:
Option slot)
KX-TDA100: 00 to 06 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 06: Free slot)
KX-TDA200: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 11: Free slot)
KX-TDA600:
• Basic Shelf: 00 to 10
(00: EMPR Card Slot; 01 to 10: Free Slots)
• Expansion Shelf: 01 to 12
(01 to 11: Free Slots; 12: BUS-S Card Slot)
• ZZ: Physical port number (01 to 16)
For OPB3 card, sub slot number (1 to 3) + port number (1
to 4) will be displayed as follows:
• Sub slot 1 of OPB3: 11 to 14
• Sub slot 2 of OPB3: 21 to 24
• Sub slot 3 of OPB3: 31 to 34
Error Message A description of the error.

To view the error log

• From the Utility menu, select Error Log.

84 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-
TDA30)
Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only) or E1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended
for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.
While monitoring is being performed, any displayed bits whose value changes from 0 to 1 or vice
versa will be highlighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed.

To view signalling bit information

1. From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600) or E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30).
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic
screen refresh.
4. Click Start.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.
To refresh the screen at any time while monitoring is stopped, click Refresh.

PC Programming Manual 85
2.5 Utility

2.5.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-

TDA600) / E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30)
Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 (KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) or E1 line. This utility is intended for use by dealers.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

To view trace data

1. From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or E1
Line Trace (for KX-TDA30).
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the CH No drop-down list, select the target channel.
4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed. The information is automatically updated whenever the data
being monitored changes.
5. Click Stop to end the trace.
6. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
Information is saved as a text-format file.
• Click Clear to erase the information.

86 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace

This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC.
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be
set to INS status.
Protocol trace data is continually accumulated on ISDN and IP-GW cards, and 3 types of data can be
downloaded:
• Real Time Trace: Pseudo-real-time data is collected through data polling at one-second
intervals. The displayed information is updated beginning when the Start button is clicked.
• Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed.
• Error Accumulation Trace: Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed. This
trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets.

To view trace data

1. From the Utility menu, select ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
3. From the Trace Data Type drop-down list, select the type of data to view.
4. Click Start.
Trace information will be displayed.
5. Select an option:
• Click Capture to save the displayed trace information.
• Click Clear to clear the screen display.
6. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 87
2.5 Utility

2.5.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report

Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks.
This option is only available at Installer level.
The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the
time period selected. Average values for these items vary depending upon many factors, such as the
equipment being used, and the distance from the telephone company.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Time Time of error
Slot Relevant slot and card type
Counter of Digital Trunk Out of SYNC (#300) Digital trunk out of sync (Loss of Signal)
Error Logs logged in
RAI (#301) Digital trunk RAI signal reception
Minor Error Log
AIS (#302) Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal
reception
Frame Failure (#300) Digital trunk frame failure (Loss of
Frame)
Counter of minor CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error
communication error
SF Severely errored frame (or Severe
Framing Error)
FE Frame synchronisation bit-error
LV Line Code Violation
SL Controlled slip

To view digital trunk information

1. From the Utility menu, select Digital Trunk Error Report.
2. From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To generate a report on a specific card, select the slot number and card name.
• To generate a report on all matching cards simultaneously, select "ALL".
3. From the Display form drop-down list, select the time period to view.
4. Click Execute.
The error report will be displayed.

88 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information (KX-TDA100/

KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Displays accumulated statistical information on both IP extensions and IP-EXT cards.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset.
Port Number of the port.
RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.
RTP Receive Lost Packet Counter Total number of packets lost.
RTP Receive Abandoned Packet Counter Total number of packets abandoned.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MAX.) [ms] Maximum time taken for a packet to
arrive.
RTP Arrive Packet Interval (MIN.) [ms] Minimum time taken for a packet to
arrive.

To view IP extension information

1. From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information.
2. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number.
3. Click Execute.
The statistical information will be displayed.
4. Select an option:
• Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information.
1. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.
2. Click Save.
• Click Clear to erase the information and reset the Collection Started Time.
5. Click Cancel to return to the main screen.

PC Programming Manual 89
2.5 Utility

2.5.14 Utility—CS Information

Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target CSIF, DHLC or DLC card be
set to INS status.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
Shelf-Slot Number of the slot (for KX-TDA600, shelf and slot)
Port Number of the port
CS Name Name of the attached CS
Status Service status of the attached CS: INS, OUS, or FAULT.
If the status is FAULT, subsequent data items for that port will be left
blank.
Version Version number of the program file stored in the CS
Revision Revision number of the program file stored in the CS
CSID 12-digit ID number of the CS
Path Number of the wireless extension currently using each path. In the
case of a group, several extensions may be using the same floating
extension number.
When an extension number is not registered, the display shows
"OFF". 2.4 GHz PSs can use up to 3 paths (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 2 paths (KX-TDA30). DECT PSs can use
up to 4 paths (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 2 paths
(KX-TDA30).
Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of
a PS Ring Group.

To view CS information
1. From the Utility menu, select CS Information.
2. From the Target CSI/F Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.
• To display information on a single card, select the slot number and name of that card.
• To display information on all matching cards, select "ALL".
3. From the Interval Timer drop-down list, select the number of seconds between each automatic
screen refresh.
4. Click Start to begin monitoring.
Monitoring will be performed and the screen will refresh according to the interval specified.
To refresh the screen manually at any time, click Refresh.
5. Click Stop to end monitoring.

90 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2.5.15 Utility—PS Information

Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS).
This option is only available at Installer level.

The displayed items are as follows:

Item Description
PS No. PS location number.
Only registered PSs will be displayed.
Extension Number Extension number of the PS.
Location—Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with.
Location—Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with.

To view PS information
1. From the Utility menu, select PS Information.
2. Click Refresh.

PC Programming Manual 91
2.5 Utility

2.5.16 Utility—Timed Update

Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them
with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the
cards.
This option is only available at Installer level.

It is recommended to set the timed update to take place during the least active time period, for
example late at night.
Cards are automatically set to OUS status during an update, and returned to INS status when the
update is complete.

This utility does not apply to CS programs. These must be updated manually using the SD Card File
View and Load utility (see 2.5.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load).
When this utility has been set, all commands that would affect the status of cards are prevented from
operating.
The list of these commands is as follows:
• Card status change (INS/OUS)
• Diagnosis commands
• Card installation
• Card deletion
• Remote reset
• LPR program download requests
• ISDN automatic setup requests (BRI card)
• Signalling Bit Monitor requests (T1/E1)
• Line trace start requests (T1/E1)
• ISDN/QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests
• Time setting
• CS program download requests
• File deletion
When a function other than those listed above, that cannot be performed while Timed Update has
been set, is selected, an error message will be displayed.

To turn this utility on:

1. From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.
2. Select the Set option.
The time setting box will become available.
3. Enter the desired time using the number keys.
Click in the hour or minute field and use the up and down arrows to adjust the displayed time in
increments of one unit.
4. Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
5. Click OK.

To turn this utility off:

1. From the Utility menu, select Timed Update.

92 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

2. Select the Off (Cancel) option.

3. Click Apply.
A message box will be displayed.
4. Click OK.

PC Programming Manual 93
2.5 Utility

2.5.17 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command

Updates the main system program and data files stored within the PBX using files taken from the SD
memory card, and resets the connected PBX.
This option is only available at Installer level.

2 copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these
files are as follows:
KX-TDA30

File Name Description

DSSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data
for the PBX.
DSSYS_S Backup main system data file
PSMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the MPR board of
the PBX.
PSMPR_S Backup PBX program file

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

File Name Description

DSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data
for the PBX.
DSYS_SUB Backup main system data file
PMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the MPR board of
the PBX.
PMPR_SUB Backup PBX program file

KX-TDA600

File Name Description

DLSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data
for the PBX.
DLSYS_S Backup main system data file
PLMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the EMPR board of
the PBX.
PLMPR_S Backup PBX program file

When new DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS and PMPR/PSMPR/PLMPR files are transferred from a connected
PC to the SD memory card using the File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) utility (see 2.5.2 Utility—
File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)), they are stored as the backup files. To use these files on the
PBX, it is necessary to first swap them with the currently active files on the SD memory card.

Requirements
• This utility only functions on PBXs version 1.005 and later.

94 PC Programming Manual
 2.5 Utility

• On earlier versions, the reset request confirmation screen will be displayed, and files will not
be updated.

To update system files and reset the PBX

1. From the Utility menu, point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command.
2. Choose whether to back up current system data or not.
• Click SD Backup to back up the current system data to the SD memory card before
proceeding.
Select this if you intend to use the current system data unchanged after reset.
• Click Skip to continue without backing up.
Select this if you intend to replace the current system data with data that was uploaded from
the PC.
The second screen will be displayed. A list of matching files found on the SD memory card, with
dates and times, is shown at the top.
3. Select whether to replace the DSYS/DSSYS/DLSYS and PMPR/PSMPR/PLMPR files or not.
When no backup file is found, the corresponding options are not available.
4. Click OK.
A confirmation screen will be displayed.
5. Select an option:
• Click OK to reset the PBX.
If OK is clicked, a final confirmation screen will be displayed.
• Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
6. Click OK to reset the PBX, or Cancel to return to the main screen without copying files.
If the reset command was not carried out correctly, an error message will be displayed, and you
will be returned to the main screen.

After resetting the PBX with this command, it is necessary to reconnect to the PBX to continue
programming.

PC Programming Manual 95
2.5 Utility

2.5.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information

Displays the Flash ROM ID number pre-assigned to the PBX, used for PBX installation management.
This option is only available in some countries/areas.

To view the Flash ROM ID

• From the Utility menu, click Flash ROM ID Information.

96 PC Programming Manual
 2.6 Help

2.6 Help

2.6.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

This section provides answers to some common questions about using the Maintenance Console
software to programme the PBX. The information is divided into the following topics:

Title Description
Connection Connecting to the PBX using Maintenance Console.
Maintenance Console Software Using the Maintenance Console software.
Card Status Changing the status (INS/OUS) of cards.
Portable Stations Setting up portable stations, including registration and
deregistration.
Numbering Changing the numbering plan for the PBX, or numbers of individual
extensions or features.
Saving Modified Data Safely saving PBX data edited with Maintenance Console.
Setting Features Setting up individual features.

Connection
Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via RS-232C cable.
A • Is the cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
• Is the serial port that the PC uses correctly specified?
• Is the baud rate correct?
The default setting, and a safe rate, is 19 200 bps.
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?

Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB.

A • Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX?
• Is the USB driver on the PC running?
To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB
Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB
driver.
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?

Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via LAN.

A • Is the PC connected to the LAN?
• Have the IP address and port number of the PBX been set correctly? For more details,
see 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only).
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?

PC Programming Manual 97
2.6 Help

Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem.

A • Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 2.17.1 [11-1] Main.
• Has a modem been installed to the PBX?
• Are the modem settings of the PBX and Maintenance Console correct? For more details,
see 2.17.1 [11-1] Main.
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?

Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via ISDN Remote.
A • Are the ISDN Remote settings of the PC correct? For more details, see 2.17.1 [11-1]
Main.
• Is the ISDN Remote dial number correct?
• Is the password correct?
• Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method?

Q Can I perform initial setup of the PBX without being connected to the PBX?
A • Yes. This is possible in Batch mode.
Create a new system data file using 2.2.1 File—New, edit settings as required, and then
upload this file to the PBX later (see 2.5.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card)).

Maintenance Console Software

Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards?
A • From 2.7.1 [1-1] Slot, click Summary. Summary information, including software
versions, is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.

Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is
too narrow.
A • Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting items, at the top of the table.
The pointer will change to a double arrow. Click and drag the line to the right until all
characters are displayed.

Card Status
Q The status of a new card will not change to "INS".
A • With the new card installed, does the total number of extensions or trunks exceed the
maximum supported by the PBX?
• Is the type of card installed in the slot different from the card type set as "Pre-install" for
that slot? Confirm that the correct card is installed in the slot.
• Is the card firmly and fully installed in the slot? Confirm that the card is installed correctly
in the slot.
• Confirm that the card is not damaged.

Q I want to set the status of only 1 port of the IP-GW4 card to "OUS".
A • This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be set
to "OUS"/"INS" together.

Q I cannot change an LCO port to INS status.

98 PC Programming Manual
 2.6 Help

A • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot?

• Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly?
Check the condition of the card.
• Is the card itself in INS status?
Set it to INS status.
• Is a trunk line connected to the appropriate port?
• Is the port in FAULT status, even though a trunk is connected?
Run diagnosis on the relevant slot.

Q How do I prevent newly installed cards automatically being changed to "INS"?

A • Change New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card in 2.7.46 [1-3] Option from
"In Service (INS)" to "Out of Service (OUS)".

Portable Stations
Q I cannot register Portable Stations using the method described in Portable
Station [1-2].
A • Is the status of the CSIF, DHLC or DLC card set to "INS"?
• Is a CS connected to the CSIF, DHLC or DLC card? If not, connect one.
• Do the PINs (Personal Identification Numbers) of the PBX and the Portable Station
match? Confirm that they are the same.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS?
• Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location?
It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations, so use the Forced De-
registration option to delete the previous registration.

Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station.

A • First, de-register the Portable Station itself, and then delete the extension number.

Q I cannot de-register a Portable Station.

A • Is the Portable Station turned on? If not, turn it on.
• Is the Portable Station within transmission range of the CS? If not, move it closer to the
CS and try the de-registration operation again.

Q The Portable Station I want to de-register is broken, and will not turn on, or is
not available, or the registration information was deleted first from the Portable
Station, so it cannot be de-registered.
A • The Portable Station can be forcibly de-registered by the following the procedure shown
in Forced De-registration of 2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station.

Q I changed the extension number of a Portable Station, but the display of the
Portable Station still shows the old extension number.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

Q I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station
still shows the old FCO.
A • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location.

PC Programming Manual 99
2.6 Help

Q If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the
Portable Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
A • Do not delete the extension number of the Portable Station, as this information is
necessary for it to operate.

Numbering
Q How do I change the extension number of a wired extension?
A • Change the extension number of the target port to the new number, and click Apply.
Next, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q I changed the extension number of a wired extension while the extension was
engaged in a call, but the display still shows the previous extension number.
A • The extension number will not change while the extension is in use. When the
conversation is finished, set the port to OUS status, and then back to INS status.

Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3-digit numbers to 4-digit
numbers?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Enter a 2-digit number in Leading Number, or change No. of Additional Digits
from "x" to "xx".
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?.

Q How do I set a 3-digit numbering plan?

A • There are 2 methods of creating a 3-digit numbering plan, using 2.8.8 [2-6-1]
Numbering Plan—Main:
1. Set the leading number to be 2 digits, with one additional digit. This method allows
a maximum of 10 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 10; No. of Additional Digits = x
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 109 can be used.
2. Set the leading number to be one digit, with 2 additional digits. This method allows
a maximum of 100 extensions.
Example: Leading Number = 1; No. of Additional Digits = xx
In this example, extension numbers 100 to 199 can be used.
For more details, see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?.

Q What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan?

100 PC Programming Manual

 2.6 Help

A • Perform the following steps:

1. Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any
extensions (see 2.4.7 Tool—Extension List View).
If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those
extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 2.10.10 [4-2-1]
Portable Station—Extension Settings).
2. Clear the Leading Number cell.
3. Click Apply.
4. Modify the No. of Additional Digits cell as required.
5. Click Apply.
6. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
7. Click Apply.
8. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
9. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
10. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, I cannot change the Leading Number.
A • It is not possible to use the same Leading Number for 2 extension blocks, or to use a
number that could possibly overlap with another Leading Number.
So, for example, if "2" is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set "21" as
another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• Another extension block
• A Dial setting (see 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q When modifying the Numbering Plan, how do I set a 1-digit extension number?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Clear the Leading Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. Set No. of Additional Digits to "None".
4. Click Apply.
5. Enter the desired value in the Leading Number cell.
6. Click Apply.
7. Set all extension ports to OUS status.
8. On the relevant screens, set the extension numbers of extensions to the desired
values.
9. Set all extension ports back to INS status.

Q How do I change a feature number?

PC Programming Manual 101

2.6 Help

A • Perform the following steps:

1. Open the 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
3. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change a feature number.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q How do I change the code used to access another PBX?

A • Perform the following steps:
1. Open the 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen.
2. Select the Other PBX Extension tab.
3. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature.
4. Click Apply.

Q I cannot change an Other PBX Extension code.

A • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items.
The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by:
• A feature number
• An extension
• A Dial setting (see 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table)
• Quick Dialling (see 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial)
In any of these cases, choose another number.

Q I cannot change a feature number on the B/NA DND Call Feature screen.
A • The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature.
Please choose a different number.

Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assigned to a newly

installed card?
A • Change New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension
Card in the 2.7.46 [1-3] Option screen from "Automatic" to "Manual".

Saving Modified Data

Q Modified settings have not been updated in the PBX.
A • Click Apply or OK in the sub-menu screen.

Q Modified settings are not saved even when I press the Apply button.
A • To save the system data files, choose Save from the File menu.

102 PC Programming Manual

 2.6 Help

Q If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not
updated in the PBX.
A • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the
SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore
the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is
turned off and back on again.
Therefore, before resetting the PBX, click the SD memory backup icon to save the
system data to the SD memory card. Alternatively, exit the Maintenance Console. This
automatically saves system data to the SD memory card.

Note
Do not remove the SD memory card while power is supplied to the PBX. Doing so may
cause the Hybrid IP-PBX to fail to start when you try to restart the system.

Q After reinitialising the PBX, I restored system data from a previous backup.
However, some of the settings have not been restored to their previous values.

PC Programming Manual 103

2.6 Help

A • The following setting data is not saved to the SD memory card, so will be deleted when
the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX's battery backup memory.
• Incoming Call Log
• Outgoing Call Log (including Last Number Redial)
• Message Waiting
• SMDR
• Advice of Charge (AOC)/Pay Tone
• Hospitality guest billing data
• ICD Group monitor log for supervisor
• PBX date and time
• Timed Reminder
• LPR Timed Update time
• Daily test start time
• PT handset/headset volume
• PT SP-PHONE volume
• PT ring volume
• PT display contrast
• ICD Group login status
(All extensions are set to Login by default.)
• ICD Group Ready/Not Ready status
(All extensions are set to Ready by default.)
• Live Call Screening (LCS) On/Off
• Hands-free Answerback status
• Absent Message status of extensions
(Absent Message data itself is not cleared.)
• FWD/DND status
(FWD destinations are not cleared.)
• Extension Dial Lock/Remote Extension Dial Lock
• Extension PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock counter
• Verification Code PIN Lock/Verification Code PIN Lock counter
• Password Lock counter for Remote System Programming
• PBX Error Log
• Digital Trunk Error Report data
In addition, the following data cannot be restored:
• SVM Log and messages (both greeting messages and voice messages left by
callers) recorded in an SVM card (KX-TDA30 only)

Setting Features
Q How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk?
A • From the 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the
target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required.

Q How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk?

104 PC Programming Manual

 2.6 Help

A • From the 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port screen, modify the CPC Signal Detection
Time—Outgoing, Incoming setting of the target port.
The required value varies by carrier. Transmission and reception can be set separately.

Q What settings do I change to enable use of an extension ISDN telephone?

A • From the 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to
use to "Extension".

Q When using a TE with an extension ISDN, how do I enable power output?

A • From the 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port screen, set ISDN TE Power on the ISDN
Extension tab to "Enable".

Q How do I connect to another PBX using QSIG?

A • From the 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port or 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to
either "QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master".

Q How do I change the type of an extension port?

A • Set the port to OUS status. Then, change DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
in the 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port window.

Q I have set the type of an extension port to "DSS Console", but I cannot apply
this setting. (Error E000402)
A • The number entered in DPT Type—Location No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) on the
2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another DSS
Console. Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.

Q I have set the type of an extension port to "VM (DPT)", but I cannot apply this
setting. (Error E000403)
A • The DPT Type—VM Unit No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) and DPT Type—VM Port No.
(for DPT or S-Hybrid port) settings entered on the 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
screen are the same as those entered for another VM (DPT). Change this so that the
numbers do not overlap.

Q I have set the type of an extension port to "PC Console", but I cannot apply this
setting. (Error E000402)
A • The number entered in DPT Type—Location No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) on the
2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port screen is the same as that entered for another PC
Console. Change this so that the numbers do not overlap.

Q What programming do I have to perform to use a headset with an extension?

A • Set Headset OFF/ON (for DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT) port) on
the 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port screen to "Headset ON".

Q What programming do I have to perform to use XDP with an extension port?

A • Set XDP Mode (for S-Hybrid port) on the 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port screen to
"On".

PC Programming Manual 105

2.6 Help

Q How do I edit a Class of Service, or create a new Class of Service?

A • Class of Service feature restrictions can be set from the 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of
Service—COS Settings screen.

Q How do I restrict calls between 2 extensions?

A • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—
Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose
extensions are blocked from calling each other.

Q How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions?

A • Trunk calls made by extensions can be restricted from the 2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of
Service—External Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the trunk
groups that cannot be used by extensions associated with a particular COS in each time
mode.
To prevent extensions associated with a COS from making trunk calls, set all trunk
groups for that COS to "Block" (blue).

Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs?

A • It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the SLT—
SLT Hold Mode option on the 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options screen.
For more details, see "1.13.1 Call Hold" of the Feature Guide.

Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group to receive trunk calls
directly?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
enter the floating extension number you chose for the ICD group in the Floating
Extension Number cell.
2. Click Apply.
3. On the 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member screen, select
the ICD group you created from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list.
4. Enter the extension numbers of member extensions in the Extension Number
column.
5. Click Apply.
6. On the DIL tab of the 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings screen, enter the
floating extension number of the ICD group as the DIL Destination—Day, Lunch,
Break, Night of each time mode.
7. Modify other settings as required from the Group—Incoming Call Distribution
Group submenu.

Q How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table.
2. On the 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen,
from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table to
use in each time mode.

106 PC Programming Manual

 2.6 Help

Q How do I add an extension as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)

group?
A • Perform the following steps:
1. On the 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member screen, from
the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select the group you want to modify.
The ICD group must have an extension number set.
2. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the
Extension Number column.
3. Set Delayed Ring as necessary.
4. Click Apply.
Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance.

Q I cannot set system speed dialling numbers from PC Console.

A • Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class, by
setting Manager on the Extension Feature tab of the 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—
COS Settings screen to "Enable".
• System speed dialling numbers can only be edited by one PC Console at a time.

Q I have set FWD through system programming, but calls are still not being
forwarded.
A • Perform the following steps:
1. Check that the Call from CO—Present Button Status or Call from Extension—
Present Button Status of the target extension on the 2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired
Extension—FWD/DND or 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND screen is
set to "FWD".
2. Create a FWD button on the target extension if one does not already exist.
3. Press the FWD button so that it changes to FWD status.

PC Programming Manual 107

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed.
Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a
summary of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button
(see 2.7.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary).

To install a new card to the PBX

1. Click on the name of the card to install in the list on the right.
An image of the card will be displayed to the left of the list, and information about the card will be
shown below.
2. Click and drag the image of the card to the free slot it is to be installed in, and release it.
The card will move into the slot space.
3. Click Yes to confirm.

To install a new shelf to the PBX (KX-TDA600 only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the first greyed PBX image at the bottom of the screen.
Pre-Install will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Pre-Install.
3. Click Yes to confirm.

To select a different shelf of the PBX (KX-TDA600 only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the white PBX image at the bottom of the screen you wish to select.
Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Click Select Shelf.

To access card properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Card Property.
The property screen for that card will be displayed.

To access port properties

1. Move the mouse pointer over a card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Port Property.
The property screen for that card's port or ports will be displayed.

To remove a card from the PBX

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card to remove.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Delete Card.

108 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

3. Click Yes to confirm.

The card will be removed.

To change the status (INS/OUS) of a card (Interactive mode only)

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select the desired status:
• Click INS to set the card to in-service status.
• Click OUS to set the card to out-of-service status.

To install an option card on an OPB3 card

1. Move the mouse pointer over the card.
A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer.
2. Select Option Card.
The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 2.7.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option
Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).

Supported Card Types

KX-TDA30

Card Maximum Supported Slot Card Programming

Quantity Numbers
MPR: Main Processing Card 1 00 2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property
DHLC4: Pre-installed Super Hybrid
1 01
Ports
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card
DLC4: 4-Port Digital Extension Card
Property
SLC4: 4-Port Single Line Telephone 1
Extension Card
BRI1: 1-Port BRI Card 2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card
02–04 (Type A
BRI2: 2-Port BRI Card Slots) Property

LCOT2: 2-Port Analogue Trunk Card 3

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
DID3: 3-Port Analogue DID Card 2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone 2
Property
Extension Card 05–07 (Type B
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Slots)
1 2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property
Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card 1 2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card 08–09 (Option 2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property
1
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card Slots) (KX-TDA30 only)

PC Programming Manual 109

2.7 [1] Configuration

KX-TDA30

Card Maximum Supported Slot Card Programming

Quantity Numbers
MSG2: 2-Channel Message Card 2
ECHO8: 8-Channel Echo Canceller
1
Card 08–11 (Option
None
EXT-CID: Extension Caller ID Card 1 Slots)

SVM2: Simplified Voice Message

2
Card

For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-TDA30
Installation Manual.

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming

MPR: Main Processing Card 1 (fixed in Slot 00) 2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension
Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone 2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card
Extension with Message Lamp Card Property
KX-TDA100: 6
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone KX-TDA200: 8
Extension Card
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Port IP Proprietary Telephone 2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card
Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only)
CSIF4: 4-Port Cell Station Interface Card KX-TDA100: 4
None
CSIF8: 8-Port Cell Station Interface Card KX-TDA200: 4

LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card

KX-TDA100: 6
LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card 2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property
KX-TDA200: 8
LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card

110 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200

Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming

BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card KX-TDA100: 6
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card KX-TDA200: 8
2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels) Property

PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)

T1: T-1 Trunk Card KX-TDA100: 4 2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property
KX-TDA200: 4 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
E1: E-1 Trunk Card 2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card 2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property
KX-TDA100: 6
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
KX-TDA200: 8
only)
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480/KX-TDA0484): 4-
Channel VoIP Gateway Card KX-TDA100: 4 2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card
KX-TDA200: 4 Property
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card KX-TDA100: 4 2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200: 4 KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card
KX-TDA100: 1
Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
KX-TDA200: 1
TDA600 only)

For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200 Installation Manual.

KX-TDA600

Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming

EMPR: Main Processing Card 1 (fixed in Slot 11) 2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property
DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension
Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone 2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card
Extension with Message Lamp Card Property
40
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone
Extension Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Port IP Proprietary Telephone 2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card
Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 111

2.7 [1] Configuration

KX-TDA600

Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming

CSIF4: 4-Port Cell Station Interface Card
16 None
CSIF8: 8-Port Cell Station Interface Card
ELCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card 40 2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
40
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card 2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels) Property

PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)

T1: T-1 Trunk Card 2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
20 only)
E1: E-1 Trunk Card 2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card 2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480): 4-Channel VoIP
20
Gateway Card
2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel VoIP
Property
Gateway Card 40
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card 2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/
16
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card
1 (can only be installed in
Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
the Basic Shelf)
TDA600 only)
EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller
8 None
Card

For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-
TDA600 Installation Manual.

112 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary

Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX.
For the KX-TDA600, when the PBX has more than two shelves, click a tab to select the shelves to
view.

No.
Indicates the slot number (reference only).

Value Range
Available slot numbers.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Card Type
Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the PBX (reference only).
Note that for MPR cards, the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name.

Value Range
Card Type for KX-TDA30:
DLC4: 4-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
SLC4: 4-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
LCOT2: 2-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
BRI1: 1-Port BRI Card
BRI2: 2-Port BRI Card
DID3: 3-Port DID Card
IP-GW4: 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
MSG2: 2-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO8: 8-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EXT-CID: Extension Caller ID Card
SVM2: Simplified Voice Message Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
MPR: MPR Card

PC Programming Manual 113

2.7 [1] Configuration

Card Type for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:

DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
CSIF8: 8-Port Cell Station Interface Card
CSIF4: 4-Port Cell Station Interface Card
LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card
LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
DID8: 8-Port Analogue DID Card
IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480/KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Port IP Proprietary Telephone Card
MPR: MPR Card

Card Type for KX-TDA600:

DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card
DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card
DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card
EMSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card
SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
ESLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card
CSI/F: 4-Port or 8-Port Cell Station Interface Card
ELCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card
BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card
BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card
PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels)
PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels)
T1: T-1 Trunk Card
E1: E-1 Trunk Card
E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card
DID8: 8-Port Analogue DID Card

114 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480/KX-TDA0484): 4-Channel VoIP Gateway Card

OPB3: Optional 3-Slot Base Card
CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card
IP-GW16: 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card
IP-EXT16: 16-Port IP Proprietary Telephone Card
EECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card
EMPR: MPR Card

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property
2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property
2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property
2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property
2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property
2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card Property
2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Status
Indicates the card status (reference only).
Note that MPR card status is always displayed as "-".

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.
Pre-Install: A card has been added to the slot.
Idle: No card is installed in the slot.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

PC Programming Manual 115

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Version
Indicates the LPR version of the installed card (reference only).
For IP-EXT cards, both the LPR version and the VoIP version are displayed. The LPR version is
shown on the left, and the VoIP version on the right, as follows:
(Example) 1.002 / 1.001

Value Range
Version number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

116 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property

MEC/EMEC card properties can be viewed and set.

Memory Expansion Card:

Indicates whether an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is
mounted on the MPR (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMPR (KX-TDA600) card.
To change the EMEC or MEC card installation status, click on this cell, then click OK in the dialog box
that appears. Clicking on the Command button performs the same function. (This operation is only
available in batch mode.)
Removing the EMEC or MEC card here also deletes related EMEC or MEC card data.
Note that when an EMEC or MEC card is installed in the PBX, any SMDR data stored in the PBX is
cleared.

Value Range
None, Installed

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA30:
2.5.7 MEC Card (KX-TDA3105)
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
2.3.2 MEC Card (KX-TDA0105)
For KX-TDA600:
2.3.2 EMEC Card (KX-TDA6105)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Memory Version:
Indicates the hardware version of the EMEC or MEC card when it is mounted on the EMPR or MPR
card (reference only).

Value Range
- (not mounted), 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 117

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

2.3.8 Software Upgrading

118 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

The property for the extension cards can be specified.

KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode

Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are
reversed or not.

Value Range
Mode 1: Does not switch the control signals
Mode 2: Switches the control signals

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Pulse Dial Mode

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Off Hook Time

Specifies the minimum length that a pulse dial sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it
as an off-hook signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

PC Programming Manual 119

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Off Hook Guard Time

Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking
them for pulse dials.

Value Range
8 × n (n=12–63) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=9–20) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–5) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

120 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Flash Detection

Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the
Flash/Recall button.

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold.
Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.3 Call Splitting

Flash Timing - Min.

Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it as
a hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–63) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash Timing - Range

Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a
hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–191) ms

PC Programming Manual 121

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF-R STD Detection Time

Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone.

Value Range
2 × n (n=1–31) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

SLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the Message Waiting lamp. This setting is only
available with MSLC/EMSLC cards.

Value Range
85 V, 145 V

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Message Waiting

Optional Equipment (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates whether an Extension Caller ID card is mounted on the SLC8 card (reference only). This is
only available with SLC8 cards.

122 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
None, Caller ID

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
2.5.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)
For KX-TDA600:
2.7.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

APT/SLT Parallel Ring

Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to ring with the APT for calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

PC Programming Manual 123

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Various settings can be programmed for each extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of
extension connected, click Port Type View.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port or channel number (reference only).

Value Range
Port or channel number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

124 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Port Type
Indicates the port type (reference only).

Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (SLC/ESLC/EMSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Telephone Type
Indicates the connected telephone type (reference only).
The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View.

Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
CS: CS is connected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.7 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Type View

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

PC Programming Manual 125

2.7 [1] Configuration

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the PBX.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.
Extension numbers of PSs can be a maximum of 4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

126 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Extension Name
Specifies the extension name of the port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

XDP Mode (for S-Hybrid port)

Turns XDP mode on or off for the port.

Value Range
On: XDP enabled (The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers. This is
called XDP Mode.)
Off: XDP disabled (The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone's extension
number. This is called Parallel Mode.)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Parallel Telephone Ringing (for S-Hybrid port)

Specifies whether the sub telephone (SLT) rings at the same time as the main telephone (DPT) for
an incoming call.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 127

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)

Selects the port type.
To change the port type of an extension port, follow the steps below:
1. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS".
2. Change the port type of the extension port, then click Apply.
3. Set the status of the extension port to "INS".
When changing the port type of an extension port for which Wireless XDP has been set on the
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings screen, the Wireless XDP setting must
be deleted first.
With MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, when changing the type of a port for which one
or more SDN buttons are set (except when changing between PC Console and Telephone), all
SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new
settings, a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN
buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel.

Value Range
Normal: For connecting a DPT
DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 4 [with the KX-TDA30], 8 [with the KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200] or 64 [with the KX-TDA600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration
PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 2 [with the KX-TDA30] or 8 [with the KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600] PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

DPT Type—Location No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)

Specifies the location number of the connected DSS Console or PC Console.
Note that, depending on system traffic, there may be a limit to the number of PC Consoles that can
be supported by a single DLC/DHLC card.
With MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, when changing the location number of a DSS
Console for which one or more SDN buttons are set, all SDN buttons customised for that device will
be deleted. When you attempt to apply the new settings, a warning message is displayed showing
the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN
buttons for this port, click Cancel.

128 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Location number for DSS Console: 1–4
Location number for PC Console: 1, 2

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–8

For KX-TDA600:
Location number for DSS Console: 1–64
Location number for PC Console: 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

DPT Type—VM Unit No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)

Selects the unit number of the connected VPS.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1, 2

For KX-TDA600:
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

DPT Type—VM Port No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)

Specifies the VM port number for the port.

PC Programming Manual 129

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–4

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Headset OFF/ON (for DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-Hybrid(S-DPT) port)

Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT.

Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.4 Headset Operation

Ringing Tone (for DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid (XDP), S-

Hybrid(SLT), S-Hybrid(S-DPT) port)
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls. This setting is not available
for the KX-T7200, the KX-T7451, APTs, or SLTs.

Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

130 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 131

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Commands for the extension ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

132 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.7 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Type View

Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs).
This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode.

Type
Indicates the types of telephone (reference only).

Value Range
New-DPT (KX-T7600 series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs other than KX-T7600 series), APT, SLT, DSS
Console, VM, Other, CS, IP-EXT (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.7 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Type View

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Total Count
Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX (reference only).
With the KX-TDA30, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of extension ports to which they are
connected; with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, CSs are counted on the basis of the
number of CSIF ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.7 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Type View

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 133

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

only)
The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service).
To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

134 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Status
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The Cell Station (CS) is in service.
OUS: The CS is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the CS.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.9 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

CS Name
Specifies the name of the CSIF port.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 135

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.9 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.9 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the CS out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the CS, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.9 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.8 [1-1] Slot—CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

136 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified.

Outgoing Guard Time

Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
3–6 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

First Dial Timer (CO)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits
to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the
dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
0.5 × n (n=1–16) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones
can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has
been dialled.

Value Range
No, Yes

PC Programming Manual 137

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer

Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal
sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.

Value Range
24 × n (n=1–50) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Bell Detection—Bell Off Detection Timer

Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer. If the PBX receives no bell signal from the
telephone company for the length of time specified here, the PBX treats the call as lost.

Value Range
1.0 s–15.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

138 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for a low speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal
and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 139

2.7 [1] Configuration

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 × n (n=6–20) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

Low Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 × n (n=3–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for a high speed pulse dial. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal
and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
Other, 60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

140 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse
Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 × n (n=4–18) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

High Speed Pulse Dial—Make Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—
Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.

Value Range
4 × n (n=3–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Type
Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

PC Programming Manual 141

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2

Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT/ELCOT card (reference only).

Value Range
None, Caller ID Card

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Caller ID Detection

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling

Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company.

Value Range
FSK (Frequency Shift Keying), FSK (with Visual Caller ID), DTMF

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Max Receive Time

Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network.

Value Range
0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

142 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection

Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID. To enable this setting, Caller ID—
Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) END Detection

Selects the method used to detect the end of Caller ID information.

Value Range
Length + Timer, Timer

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination

Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller
ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 143

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after
receiving a call. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set
to FSK.

Value Range
None, 80 × n (n=1–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer

Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting,
Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK.

Value Range
80 × n (n=13–50) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Start Code 1 and Start Code 2

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Start Code 1 is prior to
Start Code 2.

144 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Start Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of the information segment of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
None, *, #, A, B, C, D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Code-PRIVATE, OUT OF AREA,

TECHNICAL REASON, UNKNOWN NUMBER, RESTRICTED NUMBER
Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code.

PC Programming Manual 145

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Header [03]

Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal.

Value Range
DDN, Caller ID

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Selects the frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company.

Value Range
12kHz, 16kHz

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Pay Tone—Pay Tone Gain (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone.

146 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
0–31 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MIN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the minimum length that a received pay tone signal must be for the PBX to recognise it as
a pay tone signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–250) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MAX (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the maximum length that a received pay tone signal can be for the PBX to recognise it as
a pay tone signal.

Value Range
None, 8 × n (n=1–250) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 147

2.7 [1] Configuration

Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - Interval (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

only)
Specifies the maximum length of time between pay tone signals.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–250) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-

TDA600 only)
Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

148 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

PC Programming Manual 149

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.12 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Busy Out Status

Indicates the Busy Out status (reference only).

Value Range
Normal, Busy Out

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

150 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk
calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected
when a CPC signal is not detected.

Value Range
None, 6.5 ms, 8 × n (n=1–112) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the analogue trunk.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk.

PC Programming Manual 151

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Low, High

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Reverse Detection
Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected.

Value Range
Disable: For no trunk call
Outgoing: For outgoing trunk calls only
Both Call: For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Caller ID Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

152 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Pay Tone Detection (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 153

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

154 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.12 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Port Command

Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.12 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.12 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 155

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

The properties of the BRI or PRI (available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) card
can be specified.

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T202

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN
line as a TIE line.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T203

Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

156 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.

Value Range
0–18000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T302

Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap
receiving.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting)
message to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 157

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304

Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap
sending.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T305

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection)
message to ISDN.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from
ISDN.

158 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the
call.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T310

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the
Incoming Call Proceeding message.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 159

2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T316

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

160 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T322

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 161

2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9

Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T200
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T201
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

162 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN Extension—T203
Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T301
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.

Value Range
0–18000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T302
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call. Applies to overlap
receiving.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 163

2.7 [1] Configuration

ISDN Extension—T303
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting)
message to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T304
Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap
sending.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T305
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection)
message to ISDN.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

164 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T306
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection)
message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T307
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting.

Value Range
0–6000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T308
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from
ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

PC Programming Manual 165

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T309
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the
call.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T310
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call
Proceeding message.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T312
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting)
message to ISDN.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

166 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T316
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T320
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T322
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message.

Value Range
0–600 × 100 ms

PC Programming Manual 167

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T3D3
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Extension—T3D9
Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode.

Value Range
0–3000 × 100 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

168 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.

Main

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

PC Programming Manual 169

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

170 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

LLC Information
Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing
call is made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.

Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When Option / Mandatory error detection: Send the Status Message when an error (Option or
Mandatory) is detected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual
status of the call.

PC Programming Manual 171

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN CO
Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

172 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

PC Programming Manual 173

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Outgoing Call Type

Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed

174 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.

Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Extension Inter-digit
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company's ISDN Centrex Service features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode

Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold
supplementary service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link
in some countries/areas.

Value Range
1-link: One TEI is assigned to the BRI CO port.
2-link: Two TEIs are assigned to the BRI CO port. (Available when Access Mode on the Network tab
is set to P-MP.)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 175

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only
available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.
A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

ISDN Extension
Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

176 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

PC Programming Manual 177

2.7 [1] Configuration

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

ISDN TE Power
Enables the PBX to supply power to the ISDN TE (Terminal Equipment).

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

178 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

ISDN Extension Progress Tone

Enables the PBX to send call progress tones to the ISDN extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Network

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

PC Programming Manual 179

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

180 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.

Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

L1 Mode
Selects the active mode of L1 (Layer 1) on the BRI port.

Value Range
Call, Permanent

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

PC Programming Manual 181

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

L2 Mode
Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port.

Value Range
Call, Permanent

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Access Mode
Selects the configuration of the BRI port.

Value Range
P-P: Point-to-Point
P-MP: Point-to-multipoint

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

TEI Mode
Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI port.

Value Range
Automatic, Fix 0–Fix 63

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

182 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

PC Programming Manual 183

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

184 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Trunk Property (for CO port)

Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

PC Programming Manual 185

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Called Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Supplementary Service

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

186 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

PC Programming Manual 187

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
When using the Centralised VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".

Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E:
No, Yes

For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty

188 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)
1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN
1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

CCBS Option

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

PC Programming Manual 189

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.
Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on
another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension
hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.

190 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

CCBS Type
Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy
Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS delete digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.

Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

CCBS delete digits

Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the
specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies
the applicable type of call.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 191

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

192 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 193

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

only)
Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port.

Main

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

194 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Notes
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave
port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.4.1 QSIG Standard Features—SUMMARY

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

PC Programming Manual 195

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Status Message
Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.

Value Range
No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
When error detection (Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Mandatory) is detected.
When error detection (Option / Mandatory): Send the Status Message when an error (Option or
Mandatory) is detected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Status Receive
Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual
status of the call.

Value Range
Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network.
Disconnect: Disconnect the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

196 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

CRC4 Mode
Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking
control technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is
usually a 16- to 32-bit character. (Assignable only when using the PRI30 card.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port.

Value Range
B8ZS, AMI

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the port.

Value Range
Extend Multi frame (ESF), 4-Frame Multi frame (F4), 12-Frame Multi frame (F12)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 197

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

CO Setting
CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

198 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Notes
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave
port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 199

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Ring Back Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Outgoing Call Type

Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed
telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

200 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Extension Inter-digit
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

ISDN Centrex
Enables the use of the telephone company's ISDN Centrex Service features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Networking Data Transfer

Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only
available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Extension Setting
Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.

PC Programming Manual 201

2.7 [1] Configuration

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

202 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Port Type
Selects the type of the port.

Notes
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave
port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00)

Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00".

PC Programming Manual 203

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
Ring an Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

Network Configuration

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

204 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Notes
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave
port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

PC Programming Manual 205

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Network Type
Selects the network type of the port.

Value Range
0–56
(2 UK (Domestic), 5 Netherlands, 6 SwissNET2, 7 SwissNET3, 8 Euro ISDN (Standard), 14 France
(Domestic), 19 Finland, 20 Norway, 27 Australia, 51 US National ISDN 2)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Network Numbering Plan

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

206 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Notes
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave
port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension

PC Programming Manual 207

2.7 [1] Configuration

QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)

QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Trunk Property (for CO port)

Selects the trunk property of the port.

Value Range
Public: Public network
VPN: Virtual Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

208 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Called Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private

Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 209

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private

Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private
networks.

Value Range
Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Supplementary Service

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

210 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Selects the port type.

Notes
• Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave
port on another PBX.
• ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting
group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.

Value Range
CO: For connecting to public network
Extension: For connecting to extension
QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port)
QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 211

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
The available services depend on the setting of Port Type on this screen.
When using the Centralised VM feature, set CF (Rerouting) to "No".

Value Range
For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E:
No, Yes

For 3PTY:
No, Yes-3Pty

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

212 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

CCBS Type
Selects the type of call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy
Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted.
CCBS delete digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number.

Value Range
ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

CCBS delete digits

Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the
specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies
the applicable type of call.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

PC Programming Manual 213

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

214 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-

TDA600 only)
The properties of the T1 card can be specified.

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used.

Value Range
B8ZS, AMI

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications.

Value Range
D4, ESF

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ESF Frame Option

Selects the values for C-bit and D-bit. To enable this setting, Frame Sequence on this screen should
be set to ESF.

Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 215

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

LIU Send Option

Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU.

Value Range
Mode-1–Mode-8

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

LIU Receive Option

Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.

Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

First Dial Timer (CO)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits
to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the
dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
0.5 × n (n=1–16) s

216 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the
dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the
other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Answer Detection Timer

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the
telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Wink Signal Width

Specifies the length of a wink signal.

PC Programming Manual 217

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
32 × n (n=4–9) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit

Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted.

Value Range
3-n (n=0–15) dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF Tone—DTMF Receive

Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be received.

218 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
n-42–0 (n=0–31) dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Type

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 219

2.7 [1] Configuration

Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones
can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has
been dialled.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=9–20) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

220 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–5) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX)

Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (OPX)

Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–63) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 221

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Width (OPX)

Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX
can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–191) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE)

Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Minimum BREAK Width (TIE)

Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–63) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

222 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Width (TIE)

Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise
as a hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–191) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code

Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 223

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.18 [1-1] Slot—T1 Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

224 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

only)
Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).

Value Range
Channel number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 225

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.

226 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Channel Type
Selects the channel type.

Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
GCOT: Ground Start Central Office
LCOT: Loop Start Central Office
DDI/DID: Direct Dialling In/Direct Inward Dialling
TIE (E & M): TIE Line
OPX: Off Premise Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.23.1 T1 Line Service

Trunk Property (for TIE channel)

Selects the trunk property of the TIE channel.

Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 227

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

CPC Signal Detection (DDI/DID)—Outgoing, Incoming (for DDI/DID channel)

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk
calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected
when a CPC signal is not detected.

Value Range
None, 80 × n (n=2–75) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming (for GCOT or LCOT

channel)
Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk
calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected
when a CPC signal is not detected.

Value Range
None, 8 × n (n=2–112) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

228 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel.

Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Wink Signal Time Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink
signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.

Value Range
64 × n (n=1–128) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Start Signal Type

Selects the type of the start signal.

PC Programming Manual 229

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Sending Caller ID to TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Receiving Caller ID from TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ring Back Tone to Outside Caller (for DDI/DID or TIE channel)

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

230 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Dial Tone to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the
tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s , 2.5 s , 3.5 s , 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

PC Programming Manual 231

2.7 [1] Configuration

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

232 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.20 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port—Channel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed.

INS
Puts the channel in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.20 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port—Channel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.20 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port—Channel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 233

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

The properties of the E1 card can be specified.
To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2.

Line Coding
Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.

Value Range
HDB3, AMI

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Sequence
Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 card.

Value Range
PCM30, PCM30-CRC

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Option
Selects the value for C-bit and D-bit.

Value Range
C=A, D=B; C=0, D=0; C=0, D=1; C=1, D=0; C=1, D=1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

234 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the
dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the
other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Answer Detection Timer

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the
telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Seizure ACK Wait Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal.

Value Range
0.5 × n (n=1–20) s

PC Programming Manual 235

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

LIU Send Option

Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU (reference only).

Value Range
Mode 1–Mode 8

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

LIU Receive Option

Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.

Value Range
Automatic, 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

RAI Signal Detection Mode

Selects the RAI signal detection mode.

Value Range
Type 1, Type 2

236 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause.

Value Range
64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Type

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

PC Programming Manual 237

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones
can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has
been dialled.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

238 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
8 × n (n=9–20) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–5) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from an E1 line.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Minimum BREAK Width

Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from an E1 line.

PC Programming Manual 239

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–63) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Width
Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an E1 line that the PBX can recognise as a
hookswitch flash signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–191) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code

Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.

240 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.21 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 241

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

DR2 Setting Type

Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal.

Value Range
Normal, Option-1, Option-3

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Inter-digit Timer
Specifies the pseudo-answer time. This setting is available only when Option-1 or Option-3 is
selected in DR2 Setting Type on this screen.

Value Range
3–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Bit Position for Dial Pulse

Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit in a DR2 signal.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

242 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Bit Position for Clear Back

Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Forced Release
Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Forced Release Pattern

Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal.

Value Range
A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 243

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

E&M Signalling Type

Selects the control bit of an E & M signal.

Value Range
Type-1:A bit=0, Type-2:A bit=1, Type-3:B bit=0, Type-4:B bit=1, Type-5:A bit=1,B bit=1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Wink Signal Width

Specifies the length of a wink signal.

Value Range
32 × n (n=4–9) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure

Specifies the length of a seizure signal.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

244 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer

Specifies the length of an answer signal.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear

Specifies the length of a clear signal.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK

Specifies whether the PBX waits for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 245

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Meter Pulse Detection—Mode

Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses.

Value Range
No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received.
Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls.
Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Meter Pulse Detection—Bit Position

Specifies the bit position of a call charge meter pulse.

Value Range
A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Meter Pulse Detection—Length

Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge
meter pulse.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–80) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

246 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Transmit

Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP (Digital Signal Processor).

Value Range
-12 dB–3 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Receive

Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a
DTMF signal.

Value Range
-42 - 0 dB – -11- 0 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Transmit

Specifies the output power of MFC-R2 signals sent from the DSP.

Value Range
-31–0 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

PC Programming Manual 247

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive

Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as
an MFC-R2 signal.

Value Range
-38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Error Detection—Error Detection

Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Frame Error Detection—Error Rate

Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm.
To enable this setting, Frame Error Detection—Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes.

Value Range
No limit, 16 × n (n=1–7) errors/s

248 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.22 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—Line Signal Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 249

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

ANI Service—Mode
Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode.

Value Range
None: ANI service is not activated.
Incoming call only: Receives the caller's number from the E1 line.
Outgoing call only: Sends the caller's number to the E1 line.
Both calls: Sends and receives the caller's number through the E1 line.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ANI Service—ANI Max. digits

Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI.

Value Range
None, 1–16

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

MFC-R2 Timer—Forward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 forward signal sent from the telephone
company.

Value Range
1–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

250 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

MFC-R2 Timer—Backward
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the
telephone company.

Value Range
1–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

MFC-R2 Timer—Disappearance
Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 disappearance signal sent from the
telephone company.

Value Range
1–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Start

Specifies the code used to indicate the beginning of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

PC Programming Manual 251

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Complete (1)–(4)

Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number.

Value Range
ANI Complete (1): 1–15
ANI Complete (2)–(4): Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Reject

Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit

Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

252 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Timer

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of
an ANI number.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Outgoing Call

Specifies the code for sending Group-ll code to the telephone company.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Incoming Call [01]–[15]

Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively.

Value Range
Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call

PC Programming Manual 253

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-ll Code Assignment—Group-ll ANI

Specifies the Group-ll ANI start code.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code

Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*].

Value Range
11–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[#] code

Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [#].

Value Range
11–15

254 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.23 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC1

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 255

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete

Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—ANI Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1)

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI
number.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

256 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code

Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send
the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—Set up Speech Path

Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—(First) Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the first digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 257

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—(N-1) Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-1)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

258 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request

Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI number.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (1)

Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that the status of the called
destination is idle.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (2)

Specifies the code used in special circumstances, such as an international call, to inform the
telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

PC Programming Manual 259

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (3)

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is
idle when the call is disconnected by the caller.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Busy

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is
busy.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Unallocated

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the received number is not defined.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

260 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Congestion

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is
out of service.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—No Billing

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

PC Programming Manual 261

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group-B Code Assignment—Collect Call Reject

Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected.

Value Range
Undefined, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.24 [1-1] Slot—E1 Card Property—MFC2

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

262 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel.
To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).

Value Range
channel number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

PC Programming Manual 263

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Subscriber Number
Specifies the number used as the CLIP number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Channel Type
Selects the channel type.

264 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Undefined: Not assigned
DR2: Digital System R2
E&M-P: Pulsed E & M
E&M-C: Continuous E & M

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.22.1 E1 Line Service

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the E & M channel.

Value Range
Public: Use the DIL/DDI/DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

CO Dial Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk.
If MFC-R2 is selected, the PBX (not the telephone company) sends a dial tone to the caller when
making a trunk call using an E1 line.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 265

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection
1.22.1 E1 Line Service

E1 Receiver Type
Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line.
This should be set to MFC-R2 when receiving ANI (Automatic Number Identification) numbers from
the E1 line.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2, Undefined

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.22.1 E1 Line Service

Receive Digits
Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI/DID number when receiving a call
with the DDI/DID number.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA600:
0–15
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
0–7

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CPC Detection Time—Out, In

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk
calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected
when a CPC signal is not detected.

266 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
None, 80 × n (n=2–75) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E1 channel.

Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Wink Signal Time Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink
signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.

PC Programming Manual 267

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
64 × n (n=1–128) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Start Signal Type

Selects the type of the start signal.

Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Sending Caller ID to TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P
or E&M-C.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

268 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Receiving Caller ID from TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-
P or E&M-C.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Dial Tone to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the
tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 269

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Answer Wait Timer

Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk
call. The line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires.

Value Range
None, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

270 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

PC Programming Manual 271

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.26 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Channel Command

Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed.

INS
Puts the channel in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.26 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Channel Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for
the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.26 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Channel Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port

Feature Guide References

None

272 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/

KX-TDA600 only)
The properties for the E & M card can be specified.

Interface
Selects E & M signal type.

Value Range
Continuous, Pulsed with Answer, Pulsed without Answer, Continuous No Answer

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

First Dial Timer (TIE)

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the
dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the
other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Answer Detection Timer

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal. This allows the
telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 × n (n=1–255) ms

PC Programming Manual 273

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Inter-digit Timer
Specifies the pseudo-answer time.

Value Range
3–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

274 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
60 %, 67 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Type

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 275

2.7 [1] Configuration

Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones
can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has
been dialled.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=9–20) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–5) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

276 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Detection
Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Minimum BREAK Width

Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–63) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash—Flash Width
Specifies the maximum length of a hookswitch signal sent from an SLT that can be recognised by the
PBX as a flash signal.

Value Range
8 × n (n=3–191) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 277

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure

Selects the length of a seizure pulse.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer

Selects the length of an answer pulse.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear

Selects the length of a clear pulse.

Value Range
150 ms, 600 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

278 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK

Enables the PBX to wait for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Wink Signal Width

Specifies the length of a wink signal.

Value Range
32 × n (n=4–9) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 279

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code

Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.27 [1-1] Slot—E&M Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

280 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

only)
Various settings can be programmed for each E & M channel.
To change the status of channels, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CH
Indicates the channel number (reference only).

Value Range
Channel number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 281

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the channel status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The channel is in service.
OUS: The channel is out of service.
Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.29 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Trunk Property
Selects the trunk property of the channel.

Value Range
Public: Use the DIL method to distribute incoming trunk calls.
Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

282 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Gain Adjustment
Indicates the value for hardware adjustment (fixed, reference only).

Value Range
1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E & M line.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 283

2.7 [1] Configuration

CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line.

Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Wink Signal Time Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink
signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.

Value Range
64 × n (n=1–128) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Start Signal Type

Selects the type of the start signal.

Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

284 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

E&M TIE Line Type

Selects the type of the voice path for an E & M line.

Value Range
2 wires, 4 wires

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Sending Caller ID to TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Receiving Caller ID from TIE

Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Trunk Property on this screen is set to
Private.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 285

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Dial Tone to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the
tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

286 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

PC Programming Manual 287

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.29 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed.

INS
Puts the channel in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.29 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the channel out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the channel, for example, for
the purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.29 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

288 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

The property for the DID card can be specified.

First Dial Timer

Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled
digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other
PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
32 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have
enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break

Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make
(off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
60 %, 67 %

PC Programming Manual 289

2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Type

Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.

Value Range
Normal, Sweden, New Zealand

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough
time to accept the dialled digits correctly.

Value Range
630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone

Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones
can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has
been dialled.

290 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width

Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=9–20) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width

Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial.

Value Range
8 × n (n=1–5) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Line Signal Setting—Wink Signal Width

Specifies the length of a wink signal.

PC Programming Manual 291

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
32 × n (n=4–9) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code

Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series.

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID—Caller ID End Code

Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series.

292 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
*, #, A–D

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 293

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Various settings can be programmed for each DID port.
To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

294 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.32 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Dialling Mode
Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the DID line.

Value Range
DTMF, Pulse

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

DTMF Width
Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the DID line.

PC Programming Manual 295

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO Pulse Speed
Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the line.

Value Range
10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Wink Signal Time Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink
signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.

Value Range
64 × n (n=1–128) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Start Signal Type

Selects the type of the start signal.

296 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CPC Detection Time—Out (DID), In (DID)

Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk
calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected
when a CPC signal is not detected.

Value Range
None, 80 × n (n=2–75) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Sending Caller ID to CO
Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent to an analogue trunk.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 297

2.7 [1] Configuration

Receiving Caller ID from CO

Specifies whether Caller ID information is received from an analogue trunk.

Value Range
No, Yes

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller

Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Dial Tone to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the
tone.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

298 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Pause Time
Specifies the length of a pause.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Flash Time
Specifies the length of a flash signal.

Value Range
None, 16 × n (n=1–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Disconnect Time
Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 299

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

300 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.32 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Port Command

Commands for the DID ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.32 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.32 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 301

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card Property

The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified.

En-bloc Dialling setting

Selects the call dialling mode.

Value Range
En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed
telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Extension Inter-digit
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

QSIG-CT
Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.

Value Range
Yes, No

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

QSIG-CF
Enables a call to be forwarded to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network.
When using the Centralised VM feature, set this to "No".

Value Range
Yes, No

302 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card Property

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

PC Programming Manual 303

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port

Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).
To change the status of ports, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port

304 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port

Programming Manual References

2.7.35 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port —Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 305

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.35 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port —Port Command

Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.35 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port —Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.35 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port —Port Command

Programming Manual References

2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port

Feature Guide References

None

306 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified.
With MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, to adjust settings related to IP-PT network data
transmission, click Common Settings (see 2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)).

IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the card.

Value Range
0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the card.

Value Range
0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Gateway Address [Common Settings]

Displays the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs (with MPR Software File Version
3.1000 or later, reference only).
With MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, to change the value displayed here, click Common
Setting, and set the desired value for Gateway Address.

PC Programming Manual 307

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)—Gateway Address

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Keep Alive Time Out

Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it
receives no transmissions from that IP-PT. The PBX constantly confirms the status of IP-PTs. If no
communications are received from an IP-PT for the duration specified here, the PBX considers the
IP-PT to be unreachable, and sets the port status to Fault.
During operation, set between 10 s and 60 s. Settings over 60 s, and Disable, are used for debugging
purposes, and IP-PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances. Do not use
debugging settings unless instructed to do so.

Value Range
Disable, 10–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Echo Canceller Ability

Specifies the echo canceller ability time.

Value Range
OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

308 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Down)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

DSP Digital Gain (Up)

Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

EC Gain
Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain.

Value Range
-14–6 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 309

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

NLP Setting
Selects whether the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) is used to control echo sound quality.

Value Range
Use Non-Linear Processor, Use Fixed TX Gain

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

310 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common

Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (MPR
Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
IP-PT network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to
settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS.
For MPR Software File Versions earlier than 3.1000, refer to 2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings
(KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000
or later).

Gateway Address
Specifies the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs.

Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Programming Manual References

2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—
Gateway Address [Common Settings]

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the IP-EXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-EXT card uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port
number specified here.

Value Range
1024–65472

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 311

2.7 [1] Configuration

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)

Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-
PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number
specified here.

Value Range
1024–65472

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

312 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-

TDA600 only)
Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port.
To change the status of extension ports, click Command.

IP-PT Registration and De-registration

An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be
used. Programming instructions of the PBX are given below.
It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later.

Preparation
Follow the steps below to prepare before registering an IP-PT.
1. Open 2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only), and confirm that the IP address and subnet mask settings of the IP-EXT16
card are correct.
2. Open 2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later) (MPR
Software File Version 3.1000 or later) or 2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later) (all other versions), and set the gateway address.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the IP-PT.
1. Connect the IP-PT to be registered to the network and, if necessary, the power supply.
2. Click Registration.
A dialog box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the
left.
3. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current IP-PT extension number and index
number for programming.
4. Programme the relevant IP-PT.
5. Click Next.
• If the registration is still in process, the dialog box will show "Waiting for IP-PT to
register...". Click OK.
• If the registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Registration Succeed".
If there are more IP-PTs to be registered, click Continue to resume or Cancel to
terminate the registration. If not, click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show
"Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the IP-PT.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.

PC Programming Manual 313

2.7 [1] Configuration

2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Succeed".
• If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Error".
De-registration will be terminated.
4. Click Close.
If the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been
unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
1. Click Forced De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialog box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration
Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show
"None".

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

314 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the port.
To change the extension number of an extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.

Value Range
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 315

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Connection
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
This cell is only active when Status on this screen shows Registered.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Status
Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the IP-PT (reference only).

316 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Headset OFF/ON
Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT.

Value Range
Headset OFF, Headset ON

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.4 Headset Operation
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Ringing Tone
Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.

Value Range
A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz)
B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz)
C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz)
D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 317

2.7 [1] Configuration

IP Codec
Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data.

Value Range
G.711, G.729

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Packet Sampling Time

Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation.
The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
When IP Codec on this screen is set to G.711, only 20 ms and 30 ms are available.

Value Range
20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

318 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified.
To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Sub-slot
Indicates the sub-slot number (reference only).

Value Range
Sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

PC Programming Manual 319

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Feature Card Type

Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only).
Note that for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card.

Value Range
Card Type:
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card

Maximum Quantity:
MSG4: 4 with KX-TDA100, 4 with KX-TDA200, 16 with KX-TDA600
DPH4: 4 with KX-TDA100, 4 with KX-TDA200, 16 with KX-TDA600
DPH2: 8 with KX-TDA100, 8 with KX-TDA200, 32 with KX-TDA600
ECHO16: 2 with KX-TDA100, 2 with KX-TDA200
EIO4: 4 with KX-TDA100, 4 with KX-TDA200, 16 with KX-TDA600

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDA600:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Status
Indicates the status of the option card in each slot (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the card command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

320 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card has been removed from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.
Pre-Install: There is no card in the sub-slot, but the card type is programmed for the sub-slot.
Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Port Number
Indicates the port number of the mounted option card (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Status
Indicates the port status of the mounted option card (reference only).

Value Range
INS: The card is in service.
OUS: The card is out of service.
Fault: The card is pulled out from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 321

2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Device Type
Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).

Value Range
Relay, Ringer

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

Input Signal Decision Time

Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX
recognises the input and makes a sensor call.

Value Range
32 × n (n=2–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Input Signal Detection Reopening Time

Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from
the sensor will be ignored.

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–255) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

322 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

PC Programming Manual 323

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/

KX-TDA600 only)
Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed.

INS
Puts the card in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the card out of service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Pre-install
Assigns the card type to a certain sub-slot (Pre-installation).

Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card

324 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDA600:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Delete
Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub-slot.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.40 [1-1] Slot—OPB Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 325

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Option cards can be installed to and removed from the OPB3 cards installed in the PBX.
Click the right and left arrow buttons (">", "<") to add or remove option cards.

Option Card Type

Selects the type of option card to install to the OPB3 card.

Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment
For KX-TDA600:
1.3.1 Optional Equipment

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

Slot 1–Slot 3
Selects the slot on the OPB3 card to install or remove the option card for.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

326 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Feature Guide References

None

Card Inserted
Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card.

Value Range
MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card
DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card
DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card
ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only)
EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.41 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 327

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
The properties of the CTI-LINK card can be specified.
Note that the IP address information must be specified in accordance with the settings of the network
that it will be used on.

IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the PBX.

Value Range
1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Subnet Mask
Specifies the subnet mask of the PBX.

Value Range
0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Gateway
Specifies the gateway address.

Value Range
0.0.0.0, 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

328 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Maintenance Port Number

Specifies a port number used to operate KX-TDA Maintenance Console via LAN.

Value Range
10000–65535

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

CTI Port Number

Specifies a port number used to operate CTI via LAN.

Value Range
10000–65535

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

PC Programming Manual 329

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

The status of the DPH ports can be viewed, and set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service).

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Number
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Status
Indicates the port status (reference only).
This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command:
• Click the desired cell in the column.
• Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.

Value Range
INS: The port is in service.
OUS: The port is out of service.
Fault: The port is not communicating with the network.

330 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.44 [1-1] Slot—DPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

None

For Output (EIO)—Device Type

Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only).

Value Range
Relay, Ringer, Door Opener (DPH4 only)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.2 Door Open
1.17.10 External Relay Control

For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Decision Time

Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX
recognises the input and makes a sensor call.

Value Range
32 × n (n=2–255) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Detection Reopening Time

Specifies the length of time after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from
the sensor will be ignored.

PC Programming Manual 331

2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–255) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

332 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.44 [1-1] Slot—DPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)

Commands for the DPH ports can be programmed.

INS
Puts the port in service.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.44 [1-1] Slot—DPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

None

OUS
Takes the port out of service. This enables a temporary non-use of the port, for example, for the
purpose of repair.

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.44 [1-1] Slot—DPH Port Command (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 333

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA30),
128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), 256 (with the KX-TDA600) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600 with
EMEC card installed) PSs can be registered.
Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.

PS Registration and De-registration

A PS must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and PS before it can be used.
Programming instructions of the PBX are given below; programming instructions of the PS are found
in the Installation Manual.
It is possible to de-register the PS later.

Registration
Follow the steps below to register the PS.
1. Click Registration.
A dialog box will appear. Non-registered (available) extension numbers are displayed on the
left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for registration. Click Next.
A screen will appear with information on the current PS extension number and index number
for programming.
3. Register the relevant PS.
For details, refer to the Installation Manual.
KX-TDA30:
Registering DECT PS → 2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
Registering 2.4 GHz PS → 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Registering DECT PS → 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
Registering 2.4 GHz PS → 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
KX-TDA600:
Registering DECT PS → 2.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
Registering 2.4 GHz PS → 2.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
4. Click Next.
• If the PS registration is still in progress, the dialog box will show "Waiting for portable
station to register...". Click OK.
• If the registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Registration Succeed".
If there are more PSs to be registered, click Continue to resume. If not, click Close.
Once a PS is successfully registered, the status of the PS will update to show "Registered".

De-registration
Follow the steps below to de-register the PS.
1. Click De-registration.
A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for de-registration. Click Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3. Click Confirm.

334 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Succeed".
• If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialog box will show "De-registration Error".
De-registration will be terminated.
4. Click Close.
If the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

Forced De-registration
Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the PS when normal de-registration has been
unsuccessful or de-registration has been performed only on the PS.
1. Click Forced De-registration.A dialog box will appear. Registered extension numbers are
displayed on the left.
2. Highlight numbers and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click
Next.
A dialog box will appear.
3. Click OK.
A dialog box will appear.
4. Click Confirm.
• If the de-registration is successful, the dialog box will show "Forced De-registration
Succeed".
5. Click Close.
Once the PS is successfully de-registered, the status of the PS will update to show "None".

Personal Identification Number

Specifies the Personal Identification Number (PIN) of the PBX, used to avoid registering a PS to the
wrong PBX.
Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS, before the PS is registered to the PBX.

Value Range
4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Installation Manual References

For KX-TDA30:
2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
For KX-TDA600:
2.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX
2.11.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX

PC Programming Manual 335

2.7 [1] Configuration

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Index
Indicates the PS number (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–28

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128

For KX-TDA600:
1–512

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25 Portable Station (PS) Features

Extension No.
Specifies the extension number of the PS.
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone
(PT/SLT), and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone. However, note that
the PS extension number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main
telephone even if the PS is in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

336 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Status
Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).

Value Range
None, Registered

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

PC Programming Manual 337

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.46 [1-3] Option

System options can be programmed.
It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following
the procedure below in batch mode:
1. Click Clear Master CS.
2. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No.
If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is
necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode. Master CS information will be assigned
automatically when a CS is connected to the PBX. Without the Radio System ID, PSs cannot be
registered.

System Wireless—System ID
Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS (reference only).

Value Range
Not applicable.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.46 [1-3] Option

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

New Card Installation—Card Status for any Card

Selects the initial status of cards after installation.

Value Range
In Service, Out of Service

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.46 [1-3] Option

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card

Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually.

338 PC Programming Manual

 2.7 [1] Configuration

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.46 [1-3] Option

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-TDA100/KX-

TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when
it is installed for the first time.

Value Range
ISDN Standard mode: The CCBS, CF, CT, and Centralised VM features are supported. DIL and DID
call distribution are available for the D channel.
T1-LCOT mode: DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels. The CCBS, CF, CT,
and Centralised VM features are not available in this mode.

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.46 [1-3] Option

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 339

2.7 [1] Configuration

2.7.47 [1-4] Clock Priority

Slot Number (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), Shelf-Slot Number (KX-

TDA600)
Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards (the PRI, T1, and E1 cards
are available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) that are used to forward a clock
pulse from an external source to the PBX.
Obtain the master clock time from the outside line that the telephone company provides.
To change Clock Priority, follow the steps below:
1. Assign a Clock Priority to each BRI, PRI, T1 and/or E1 card.
2. Set the status of the present clock source card to "OUS", then "INS".
Note
If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network (TIE line service, QSIG network, etc.)
without being connected through the telephone company, assign only one PBX as the clock
source on the network. That PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line
selected as its clock source. All other PBXs should have cards connected to the network selected
as the clock source. This enables all PBXs on the network to synchronise their timing.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
None, BRI1, BRI2, E1

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
None, BRI4, BRI8, PRI23, PRI30, T1, E1

Maintenance Console Location

2.7.47 [1-4] Clock Priority

Feature Guide References

None

340 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8 [2] System

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

The date and time of the PBX, and Summer time (daylight saving time) can be programmed. Summer
time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on
the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be
programmed.
To set the system date and time of the PBX, click 2.8.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date
& Time Setting.

Setting
Enables Summer time.

Value Range
Enable, Disable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

Start Date—Year, Month, Day

Specifies the start date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

PC Programming Manual 341

2.8 [2] System

End Date—Year, Month, Day

Specifies the end date of daylight savings time.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 1–12
Day: 1–31

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

342 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting

The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display
of extensions (e.g., PT, PS).

Date & Time

Indicates the current date and time. Values can be entered by clicking the parameter you want to
change and typing the new value, or by clicking the up/down arrows beside the date and time.

Value Range
Year: 2000–2099
Month: 01–12
Day: 01–31
Hour: 00–23
Minute: 00–59
Second: 00–59

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting

Programming Manual References

2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 343

2.8 [2] System

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified.

PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be
designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). To select an extension
number, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.5 Operator Features

BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/

KX-TDA600 only)
Selects the audio source of BGM2.

Value Range
External BGM Port 2, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

344 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only)

Selects the audio source of BGM.

Value Range
External BGM, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold

Selects the audio source for Music on Hold.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Tone, BGM

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Tone, BGM 1 (External BGM Port 1), BGM 2 (Internal 1/2 or External 2)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold

BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer

Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer (either the same music source chosen for the Music
on Hold, or ringback tone).

Value Range
Same as Music on Hold, Ringback Tone

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

PC Programming Manual 345

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

346 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Various system timers and counters can be programmed.

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter

Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval

Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts.

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–360) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic Redial
attempt. This is the length of time that the called party's extension will ring for each attempt.

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–30) s

PC Programming Manual 347

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer

Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller's voice and cancels busy tone
detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.

Value Range
0–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start

Specifies the length of time between going off-hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot
Line feature is set.

Value Range
0–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Dial—Extension First Digit

Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or
destination must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard.

348 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Dial—Extension Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a
reorder tone.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Dial—Analogue CO First Digit

Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an
analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and
stops muting the caller's voice over the analogue trunk.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 349

2.8 [2] System

Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit
Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an
analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and
stops muting the caller's voice over the analogue trunk.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Dial—Analogue CO Call Duration Start

Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing
analogue trunk calls.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing
destination in each time mode.
Note that with MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, this setting is only valid for extensions
whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (MPR Software File Version 3.1000
or later) is set to "0".

Value Range
1–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

350 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time—Intercept No
Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Recall—Hold Recall
Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when
a held call remains unretrieved.

Value Range
0 (disable the Hold Recall)–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

Recall—Transfer Recall
Specifies the length of time that a transferred call waits to be answered, before being redirected to
the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the original transferring extension.

Value Range
1–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

Recall—Call Park Recall

Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall
destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.

PC Programming Manual 351

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
1–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Recall—Disconnect after Recall

Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone
that the held call is disconnected.

Value Range
1–30 min

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone

Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in
busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through
DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.)

Value Range
0 (continuous)–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.8 Busy Line/Busy Party Features

352 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return
to idle status when this timer expires.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard from the built-in speaker of a PT in hands-
free mode. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. This setting is applied to PSs as
well as PTs.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

DISA—Delayed Answer Timer

Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM.

Value Range
0–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual 353

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after Answering

Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line.

Value Range
0.0–12.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer

Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialling
before the call is redirected to the operator.

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—Operator (Extension Number)

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA

Specifies the length of time in which the caller must dial the second digit before the DISA AA Service
activates.

Value Range
0–5 s

354 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the
intercept routing destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Intercept (not available for MPR Software File Version
3.1000 or later)—Intercept Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (not available for MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When called
party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept

Specifies the length of time that an intercepted DISA call rings at the intercept routing destination
before being disconnected.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

PC Programming Manual 355

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter

Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line.
(Selecting "0" enables the caller to prolong the trunk-to-trunk call without restriction.)

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time

Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the
caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.)

Value Range
0–7 min

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message

Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording
an OGM.

Value Range
0–7 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

356 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

DISA—Reorder Tone Duration

Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected.

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Doorphone—Call Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there
is no answer.

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–15) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone—Call Duration
Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected.

Value Range
10 × n (n=0–30) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

PC Programming Manual 357

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Doorphone—Open Duration
Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension.

Value Range
2–7 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Feature Guide References

1.17.2 Door Open

Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter

Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated.

Value Range
1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder—Interval Time

Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms.

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–120) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

358 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration

Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings.

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–30) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer

Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall
tone.

Value Range
0–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference

Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer

Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning
tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference Recall tone but does not
return to the conference.

Value Range
0–240 s

PC Programming Manual 359

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference

Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer

Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved
in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the
conference.

Value Range
0–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference

Miscellaneous

Caller ID—Waiting to receive

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk. If the
Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through
a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled, this timer is not applicable.

Value Range
0–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

360 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display

Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue
line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display
for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.

Value Range
0–250 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.18.1 Caller ID

Extension PIN—Lock Counter

Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked.
A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager.
(Specifying "None" disables this counter.)

Value Range
None, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

External Sensor—Ring Duration

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer before cancelling a
sensor call.

Value Range
10 × n (n=1–15) s

PC Programming Manual 361

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Receiving Dial Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID

Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network.
The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

Value Range
0–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Receiving Dial Inter-digit Timer—TIE

Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line. The call
will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

Value Range
3–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode

Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension
returns to idle status.

362 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
1–15 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time

Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a trunk (for example, to transfer a call) until
the VPS goes on hook. If the time specified here is too short, the VPS will be unable to dial the
number and make a connection.

Value Range
1–30 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24 Voice Mail Features

During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length

Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS
during a conversation.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms, 240 ms, 320 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 363

2.8 [2] System

During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause

Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a
PT or PS during a conversation.

Value Range
64 + 16 × n (n=0–15) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

During Conversation—Pause Signal Time

Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation.

Value Range
1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer

When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for
the PS before setting its status to Out of Range.
If "0" is assigned, the timer is controlled by the cell station.

Value Range
0 s, 4 s, 8 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

364 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

SVM—Recording Time (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature.

Value Range
1–600 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)
2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for
an extension are finished playing.

Value Range
1–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)
2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Broadcasting—Ring Duration
Specifies the length of time that a broadcasting call will ring. The broadcasting call will be established
with members who answer within this time. If no members answer the call before this timer expires,
the call is cancelled.

Value Range
0–120 s

PC Programming Manual 365

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Broadcasting Operation
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—Broadcasting Operation
2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

366 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time
of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching
mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.
Time Table numbers correspond to tenant numbers (for example, Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1). Select
the desired Time Table from the Time Table No. list.
When in Automatic Switching mode, the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the
corresponding Time Table. Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension
(determined by COS).
• To adjust the currently displayed Time Table, click and drag the divisions between two time
periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Time Table, including adding or
deleting time blocks, click Time Setting.

PC Programming Manual 367

2.8 [2] System

2.8.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting

The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the
selected Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods.

1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—

Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service

1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1 Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Hour,

Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block. Times can only be set when 1. Day/Lunch/Night—Day1
Start, Lunch Start, Day2 Start, Night Start—Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting

Enables the setting of the start time for each break period.

368 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute

Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3
Start—Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service

2. Break—Break 1–3 End—Hour, Minute

Specifies the end time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3
Start—Setting is set to Enable.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 369

2.8 [2] System

2.2.4 Time Service

370 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select
the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list.
The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed.

Holiday Table—Setting
Enables the setting of the holiday.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—Start Date—Month

Specifies the month of the holiday start date.

Value Range
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—Start Date—Day

Specifies the day of the holiday start date.

Value Range
1–31

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

PC Programming Manual 371

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—End Date—Month

Specifies the month of the holiday end date.

Value Range
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Holiday Table—End Date—Day

Specifies the day of the holiday end date.

Value Range
1–31

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

372 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other
PBXs in a network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the
Feature Guide.

Extension
The leading numbers and the number of additional digits of the extension numbers for a maximum of
64 different extension numbering schemes can be programmed.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number of extension numbers and floating extension numbers.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 2 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

None

No. of Additional Digits

Specifies the number of additional digits following the leading number.

Value Range
None: 0 digit
X: 1 digit
XX: 2 digits

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 373

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Features
Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are
available while hearing a dial tone.

Operator Call
Specifies the feature number used to call the operator.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Feature Guide References

2.2.5 Operator Features

Idle Line Access (Local Access)

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access (selects an idle trunk
automatically).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Group Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group.

374 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

TIE Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Redial
Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling

Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number.

PC Programming Manual 375

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Personal Speed Dialling - Programming

Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Doorphone Call
Specifies the feature number used to make a call to a doorphone.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Group Paging
Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group.

376 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

External BGM On / Off

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external
BGM.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Manager

Feature Guide References

1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

OGM Record / Clear / Playback

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a
certain OGM.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Manager

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

PC Programming Manual 377

2.8 [2] System

Single CO Line Access

Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring
when receiving an incoming call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

Group Call Pickup

Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

378 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Directed Call Pickup

Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

TAFAS Answer
Specifies the feature number used to answer a trunk call notified through an external pager.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Feature Guide References

1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Group Paging Answer

Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

PC Programming Manual 379

2.8 [2] System

Automatic Callback Busy Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code

Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change
the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through
DISA.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extension—Remote
Operation by Other Extension

Feature Guide References

1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extension—Accept
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS

380 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Account Code Entry

Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve

Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number

Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a
holding extension number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 381

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

Call Park / Call Park Retrieve

Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking
zone.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number

Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying
the held trunk number.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

Door Open
Specifies the feature number used to open a door.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

382 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Feature Guide References

1.17.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

External Feature Access

Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

ISDN Hold
Specifies the feature number used to hold a call using the ISDN service of the telephone company,
instead of the PBX feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 383

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

COLR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the
called party's number to the caller.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR,
CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

CLIR Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel CLIR, which suppresses the presentation of the
caller's number to the called party.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR,
CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary Service—
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

384 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected

Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension

Specifies the feature number used to send either the CLIP number of the trunk in use (subscriber's
number) or the extension to the network.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—ISDN CO—Subscriber Number
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—Subscriber
Number
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—CLIP ID
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

MCID
Specifies the feature number used to ask the telephone company to trace a malicious call. This
feature can be used during a call or while hearing a reorder tone after the caller hangs up.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside
party using the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD
setting.
Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.

PC Programming Manual 385

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Message Waiting

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk and intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

386 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)

FWD No Answer Timer Set

Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

PC Programming Manual 387

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an
incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk calls to an incoming call
distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming
call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

388 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions
from picking up calls to your extension).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Paging Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions
from paging your extension).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

Walking Extension
Specifies the feature number used to use the same extension settings at a new extension.

PC Programming Manual 389

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.3 Walking Extension

Data Line Security Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from
other extensions during data transmission).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.5 Data Line Security

Call Waiting Mode: Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call

Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification
from an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

390 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Call Waiting Mode: Automatic Call Waiting

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk, doorphone,
or a call via an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other
extensions from joining your conversation).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Executive Busy Override
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Executive Busy Override
Deny

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off

Specifies the feature number used to enter or leave Not Ready mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

PC Programming Manual 391

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Log-in / Log-out
Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Incoming Call Queue Monitor

Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor
the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—Supervisor
Extension Number

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set/cancel the Hot Line feature, or programme the number to
be automatically dialled.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

392 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Absent Message Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Absent Message

BGM Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker
while on-hook.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely (Wake-up Call).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

PC Programming Manual 393

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Timed Reminder Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Printing Message
Specifies the feature number used to select a Printing Message to be output on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8

Feature Guide References

1.26.2 Printing Message

Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and
change the forwarding destination, using the Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

394 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock

Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode
manually.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Time Service Switch
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Manager

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Remote Extension Dial Lock Off

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to unlock other extensions
using the Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Manager

Feature Guide References

1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock

Remote Extension Dial Lock On

Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to lock other extensions using
the Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 395

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Manager

Feature Guide References

1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension PIN Set / Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Dial Information (CTI)

Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

396 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Broadcasting Operation
Specifies the feature number used to make a broadcasting call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Broadcasting—Ring Duration
2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—Broadcasting Operation
2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

Centralized BLF Monitor Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel monitoring of an extension using an NDSS button.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Busy Out Cancel

Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk.

PC Programming Manual 397

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Simplified Voice Message Access (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete
messages.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)
2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Other PBX Extension

Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different
locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called
should be entered in this table. A maximum of 16 leading numbers can be programmed.

Dial
Specifies the leading extension number of the other PBX.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Leading Number

398 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

KX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

The settings of the MESSAGE button and One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 can be programmed.

Dial
Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number
for each button (reference only).

Value Range
B: For MESSAGE button
A1: For One-touch button 1
A2: For One-touch button 2
A3: For One-touch button 3
A4: For One-touch button 4
A5: For One-touch button 5
A6: For One-touch button 6
A7: For One-touch button 7
A8: For One-touch button 8

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

Message Key—Phone Number

Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE button on the KX-
T7710 is pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a
message waiting indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.
This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

PC Programming Manual 399

2.8 [2] System

One-touch Dial 01–08—Phone Number

Specifies the number dialled when a one-touch button on the KX-T7710 is pressed.
This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX".

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

400 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features
without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap
with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks" in
the Feature Guide).
A maximum of 80 Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. When an EMEC/MEC card is installed
in the PBX, a maximum of 4000 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 1000 (with the KX-
TDA30) Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. To display other sets of numbers, click the
applicable tab.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the
Feature Guide.

Dial
Specifies the Quick Dialling number.

Value Range
Basic Memory: Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)
MEC expansion memory: Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Phone Number
Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

PC Programming Manual 401

2.8 [2] System

2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

402 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features
are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature
number.
For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the
Feature Guide.

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call
an extension in DND mode.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension
Call
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension
Call

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Executive Busy Override

Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference
call.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Executive Busy Override
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny

PC Programming Manual 403

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice

Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension's preset call
receiving method to ring tone or voice.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.3 Intercom Call

Message Waiting Set

Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Message Waiting

Call Monitor
Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension's conversation.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Call Monitor

404 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny

Feature Guide References

1.8.3 Call Monitor

Automatic Callback Busy

Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line
becomes idle.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting, or call
an extension in DND mode. This is the same setting as BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND
Override on this screen, and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features.
This can be useful, for example, if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activate DND
Override.

Value Range
1 digit (0–9, *, or #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension
Call
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension
Call

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

PC Programming Manual 405

2.8 [2] System

1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

406 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class
of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS.
A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.

TRS
Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) level for making trunk calls in each time
mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—COS
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—COS
2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code
2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code

PC Programming Manual 407

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

TRS Level on Extension Lock

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the
Extension Dial Lock feature.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code
2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code

Feature Guide References

1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock

TRS Level for System Speed Dialling

Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers, which
overrides the TRS/Barring set for the current time mode.

Value Range
1: Allows all trunk calls
2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables
7: Restricts all trunk calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Override by System Speed Dialling

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

408 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

CO & SMDR

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit

Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature. The maximum call duration can be set using
Extension-CO Duration Time on 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Transfer to CO
Enables the transferring of calls to trunks.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

PC Programming Manual 409

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Forward to CO
Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Account Code Mode

Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Option, Forced

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

CF (MSN)
Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone
company, instead of the PBX, on an MSN basis.

410 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)

Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Extension Feature
The use of features related to extension operations can be programmed for each COS.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 411

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Executive Busy Override

Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

DND Override
Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

OHCA / Whisper OHCA

Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature
number.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

412 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.8.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Call Monitor
Enables listening to a busy extension's conversation.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.8.3 Call Monitor

Call Pickup by DSS

Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 413

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Programming & Manager

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Executive Busy Override Deny

Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Group Forward Set

Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Disable: An extension cannot set call forwarding for any group.
Enable-All: An extension can set call forwarding for all groups.
Enable-Group: An extension can only set call forwarding for the group to which the extension belongs.

414 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Programming Mode Level

Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming.

Value Range
Disable: A PT user cannot perform any programming.
PROG Only: A PT user can perform only personal programming.
PROG and PROG **/*#: A PT user can perform both personal and system programming.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

Manager
Specifies the authorisation to use manager features.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

2.2.6 Manager Features

PC Programming Manual 415

2.8 [2] System

Time Service Switch

Enables manual switching of time modes.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

PDN/SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and
to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate
for extensions at each COS level.

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

SDN Key Mode (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Selects what happens when an extension user presses an SDN button while on hook.

Value Range
Enhanced DSS: The registered (owner) extension is called.
Standard SDN: A dial tone is heard.

416 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Making call by COS of SDN Key's Owner (MPR Software File Version 3.1000
or later)
Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN
button's registered (owner) extension.
This setting is only available when SDN Key Mode (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
above is set to "Standard SDN".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later)—COS Name

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

SDN Key Assignment by PT Program (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or

later)
Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

PC Programming Manual 417

2.8 [2] System

Optional Device & Other Extension

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Door Unlock
Enables using the door opener feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.17.2 Door Open

External Relay Access

Enables access to external relays.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

418 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

Accept the Call from DISA

Enables reception of calls from DISA.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Remote Operation by Other Extension

Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the
PBX using DISA).

Value Range
Allow, Deny

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.9.5 Walking COS

Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS

Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS.

Value Range
Allow, Deny

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

PC Programming Manual 419

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS

Feature Guide References

1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Miscellaneous

COS Name
Specifies the name of the COS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Broadcasting Operation
Enables making broadcasting calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Broadcasting—Ring Duration
2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Broadcasting Operation
2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

Accept a collect call (for Brazil)

Enables accepting collect calls.

420 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 421

2.8 [2] System

2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block

Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time
mode (day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list.

Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96

(KX-TDA600)
Specifies the available trunk groups.

Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

422 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions,
incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed
to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.

COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension
1–64
Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.

Value Range
Block (blue), Non Block

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—COS
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—COS

Feature Guide References

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

PC Programming Manual 423

2.8 [2] System

2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO

Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that
the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any
pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option1, Option2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings—Trunk Group Number
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

424 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone

Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the
doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be
programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
1.17.1 Doorphone Call

PC Programming Manual 425

2.8 [2] System

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by
certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring
Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an
extension.
For more information on ring tone patterns, see "1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection" in the Feature
Guide.

Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

None

Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

None

Call Back—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for callback ringing by Automatic Callback Busy.

426 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

None

Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for LCS warning tones.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

None

External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor.

Value Range
Single, Double, Triple, Option 1, Option 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 427

2.8 [2] System

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Various system settings can be programmed.

Option 1

PT LCD—Date Display
Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions.

Value Range
Date-Month, Month-Date

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PT LCD—Time Display
Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions. The time display format assigned here
applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature.

Value Range
12H, 24H

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

PT LCD—Password / PIN Display

Selects whether passwords and PINs (Personal Identification Number) are hidden or shown on the
displays of extensions while being entered.

Value Range
Hide, Display

428 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated.

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.20.3 LED Indication

PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the DND feature is activated.

Value Range
On (Solid): Red on
Flash: Slow red flashing

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.20.3 LED Indication

PC Programming Manual 429

2.8 [2] System

PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle

Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/
DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode
cannot be changed.)

Value Range
FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: Switch the FWD on/DND on/Off mode instead of entering the
programming mode for the FWD/DND setting. (When there are separate FWD/DND settings for calls
from trunks and calls from extensions, mode switching cannot be performed.)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension

Specifies whether extensions can receive paging when in DND mode.

Value Range
Do Not Page, Page

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND
2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T75xx/T76xx

Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7500, or KX-T7600 series telephones and
IP-PTs.

Value Range
Disable: The PT user's voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party's voice is
heard through the hands-free speaker.

430 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Enable: The PT user's voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party's voice is heard
through both the hands-free speaker and the handset.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key

Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call.

Value Range
Enable: Pressing the S-CO button activates the Privacy Release feature
Disable: Pressing the S-CO button switches the information shown on the PT display.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.3 Privacy Release

PT Operation—JOG Dial Speed

Selects the speed at which items scroll on the display when the Jog Dial is used.

Value Range
Normal, High Speed

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 431

2.8 [2] System

PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting

Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users
cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after

Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands-free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation
is established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk.

Value Range
No Ring, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key

Selects whether calls are disconnected or held when an INTERCOM, PDN, CO, or ICD Group button
is pressed while having a conversation.

Value Range
Disable (Disconnect), Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

432 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

PT Operation—Hold Key Mode

Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without
Announcement feature.

Value Range
Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

Option 2

Extension Clear—Call Waiting

Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual 433

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)

Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed.

Value Range
Clear, Do not clear

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

CODEC—System CODEC
Selects the CODEC type for DPTs and PSs.

Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CODEC—Network CODEC (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Selects the CODEC type for ISDN or T1/E1 lines.

Value Range
A-Law, µ-Law

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

434 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode

Specifies whether to automatically send "#" as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line; if used as
the end code, "#" will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the "#" key is pressed.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—ISDN CO—ISDN Outgoing Call Type
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—ISDN
Outgoing Call Type

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)

Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not
answer within a preprogrammed time period.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Redial—Automatic Redial for Analogue CO

Selects whether Automatic Redial to an analogue CO line is performed when the called party does
not answer within a preprogrammed time period.

PC Programming Manual 435

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory

Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific
extension within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

Redial—Call Log by Redial key

Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

436 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call

Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both
outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit
can be assigned on a trunk group basis.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Extension-CO Line Call Duration
Limit
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Extension-CO Duration Time

Feature Guide References

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Automatic Time Adjustment—by ISDN & Caller ID (FSK)

Enables the PBX to adjust its clock every day according to the time information that the network
provides with the first call after 3:05 AM.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.5 Automatic Setup

Option 3

Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Doorphone / Called by Voice

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1. Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a doorphone when
the doorphone button is pressed, or from a PT when it receives a call in voice-calling mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual 437

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it
receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback
1.15.1 Paging
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after making call

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension
when, for example, it pages another extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after answering call

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension
when answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature.

438 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension
when a new party joins a conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-2. Confirmation Tone 4-2 is heard from an extension
when a party leaves a conference call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

PC Programming Manual 439

2.8 [2] System

Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when
it holds a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.29.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension

Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them.

Value Range
Type A, Type B

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.29.1 Dial Tone

440 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using
the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling.

Value Range
Type A, Type B

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1.29.1 Dial Tone

Echo Cancel—Conference
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for conference calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.14.1.2 Conference

Echo Cancel—CO-to-CO
Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for trunk-to-trunk calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 441

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

None

Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line

Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-analogue trunk calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Echo Cancel—Extension to Digital Line

Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
If set to "Enable", the echo canceller card is used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.
If set to "Disable", the echo canceller card is not used for extension-to-ISDN/T1/E1 line calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Option 4

DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call

Enables the use of a DSS button to pick up an incoming call to another extension or an ICD group.

Value Range
ON or Flash, OFF

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

442 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
1.20.3 LED Indication

DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To
enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON
or Flash.

Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call

Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call
distribution group.
To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to
ON or Flash.

Value Range
Disable: The DSS button will light up when a call arrives, but pressing it will not pick up the call.
Enable: The DSS button will flash when a call arrives, and pressing it will pick up the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

PC Programming Manual 443

2.8 [2] System

DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call

Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects
the current call or places the call on consultation hold.

Value Range
Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN
button.
Enable: The PBX places the current call on consultation hold.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation

Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy.

Value Range
Disable: The call is not transferred. (If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification
feature, it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer.)
Enable: The transferred call is queued for the time period specified in Recall—Transfer Recall in
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Recall—Transfer Recall

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.12.1 Call Transfer

Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call

Enables transferred calls (including direct extension calls) to be automatically answered, when using
the Hands-free Answerback feature.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

444 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held Party)

Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to
"Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller's CLIP information, not the information
of the extension that performed the transfer.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular Phone

Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the virtual PS's
forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call received at an ICD Group containing a
virtual PS.
This setting only applies to calls automatically forwarded to public trunk lines using the virtual PS
feature.

Value Range
Disable: The CLIP number assigned to the virtual PS is sent.
Enable: The CLIP number of the calling party is sent.

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group
1.30.6 Network ICD Group

PC Programming Manual 445

2.8 [2] System

Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public

Caller ID Digits
Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered
as a call from a public network.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Private Network—Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs (Optional SD

Card Required)
Enables extensions at two PBXs connected in a network (not including a VoIP network) to have the
same leading number. For example, extension 101 is registered at PBX 1, and extension 102 is
registered at PBX 2. Only the Extension Number Method is supported.
If disabled, different leading numbers need to be assigned for extensions at each PBX.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Leading Number

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the
PS for a preset length of time. This feature must be enabled to allow PS roaming.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

446 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer

Feature Guide References

1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (MPR Software File

Version 3.1000 or later)
Selects whether call information (such as Caller ID) is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS
(i.e., a PS with one or more PDN buttons) when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Option 5

SLT—SLT Hold Mode

Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT. For details of each mode, see "1.13.1 Call
Hold" in the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.1 Call Hold

SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600

only)
Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs.

PC Programming Manual 447

2.8 [2] System

Value Range
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Message Waiting

Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx

Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs, and DPTs other than KX-T7400 series, KX-
T7500 series, or KX-T7600 series.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user
calls a busy extension.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

448 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO

Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected,
preventing that trunk from being used.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

ISDN Voice Path Connection—Connect when "Alert" is sent from ISDN

Enables the voice path of an ISDN line to connect even when an "Alert" signal is received from the
telephone company.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PT Feature Access—No. 1–8

Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension.

Value Range
None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay
ON, External BGM, Paging

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 449

2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

None

ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later)
Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for
networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received.

Value Range
Mode1: Disable
Mode2: Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Option 6 (CTI)

1st Party CTI—System status retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for First Party
Call Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

1st Party CTI—System status retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI. When
the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the PBX
assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.

450 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

1st Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR (Call Detail Recording) is retried when no
response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

1st Party CTI—CDR retry counter

Specifies the number of times the alive check of CDR is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI.
When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success, the
association is released automatically.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

PC Programming Manual 451

2.8 [2] System

3rd Party CTI—System status retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check is retried when no response is received, for Third
Party Call Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When
the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX
assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer

Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR is retried when no response is received, for
Third Party Call Control CTI.

Value Range
0–60 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

452 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

3rd Party CTI—CDR retry counter

Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI.
When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times, the association is released
automatically.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

CTI Multi PBX Control—PBX Name

Specifies the name of the PBX, for network programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CTI Multi PBX Control—USB Serial Number

Specifies the serial number assigned to this PBX's USB data transfers, used when multiple PBXs are
connected via USB to one PC (for example, for CTI).

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

PC Programming Manual 453

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CTI Make Call—SLT Ring

Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI, instead of the SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

454 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed.

Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies a group of 4 SLT ports that can transfer Caller ID information to connected SLTs.
When the port to which an extension is connected has this feature activated, there will be a short
delay before the extension rings for incoming calls.

Value Range
Disable: No port
Slot 01:DHLC4: Initially installed 4 Super Hybrid ports
Slot nn:SLC4: Ports 1 to 4 of the SLC4 card (nn=slot number)
Slot nn:SLC8 1-4: Ports 1 to 4 of the SLC8 card (nn=slot number)
Slot nn:SLC8 5-8: Ports 5 to 8 of the SLC8 card (nn=slot number)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Extension Caller ID Sending

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Extension Caller ID Modulation Type

Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore)

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Channel Seizure Signal bits

Specifies the number of seizure bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
10 × n (n=3–40) bits

PC Programming Manual 455

2.8 [2] System

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Mark Signal bits

Specifies the number of mark bits to send when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
10 × n (n=3–40) bits

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Channel Seizure Wait Time

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the
first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
64 × n (n=5–35) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Caller ID Signal Type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT
(reference only).

456 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Value Range
FSK

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID

Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number
when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Date & Time to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the date and time of an incoming call when sending Caller ID information
to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 457

2.8 [2] System

Send Caller ID Name to Extension

Enables the PBX to send the caller's name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension

Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending
Caller ID information to an SLT.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

458 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed.

Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1.

Value Range
-15–15 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 2.

Value Range
-15–15 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the paging volume for the External Pager.

Value Range
-15–15 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

PC Programming Manual 459

2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker

Specifies the volume when paging is broadcast through the speaker of a PT.

Value Range
-15dB, -12dB, -9dB, -6dB, -3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1.

Value Range
-11–11 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 2.

Value Range
-11–11 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

460 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the music volume for the External BGM.

Value Range
-11–11 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

PC Programming Manual 461

2.8 [2] System

2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-

TDA600 only)
Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card.

Up Gain (To PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX.

Value Range
-15–15 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Down Gain (From PBX)

Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card.

Value Range
-15–15 dB

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

462 PC Programming Manual

 2.8 [2] System

2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-

TDA600 only) (not available for MPR Software File Version
3.1000 or later)
IP-PT network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to
settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS.
For MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, refer to 2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card
Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later).

Gateway Address
Specifies the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs.

Value Range
0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server)

Specifies the UDP port used by the IP-EXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer
Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-EXT card uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port
number specified here.

Value Range
1024–65472

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

PC Programming Manual 463

2.8 [2] System

Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (IP-PT)

Specifies the UDP port used to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data on the IP-
PT side. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 64 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number
specified here.

Value Range
1024–65472

Maintenance Console Location

2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

464 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings
of the trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96
(with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups can be programmed.
For more information on trunk groups, see "2.2.2 Group" in the Feature Guide.

Main

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

COS
Specifies the COS of the trunk group, applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with
TIE Line Service.
If you wish to prevent such calls from being made, ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS
level of "7" assigned for all relevant time modes in 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 465

2.9 [3] Group

Line Hunting Order

Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed
to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks.

Value Range
High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

CO-CO Duration Time

Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected.

Value Range
None, 1–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Extension-CO Duration Time

Specifies the length of time that an extension-to-trunk call can be maintained before being
disconnected.

Value Range
None, 1–60 min

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

466 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Caller-ID Modification Table

Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number).

Value Range
1–4

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Dialling Plan Table

Specifies the table to be used for en-bloc dialling.

Value Range
1–4

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

None

Tone Detection

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

PC Programming Manual 467

2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Tone Detection—Silence

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Tone Detection—Continuous

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic

Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

468 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence (KX-TDA30 only)

Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous (KX-TDA30 only)

Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by continuous signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic (KX-TDA30 only)

Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

PC Programming Manual 469

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Intercept (not available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Group Name (not available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

Intercept Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (not available for MPR

Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the intercept routing destination of unanswered calls (whose original destination is the
floating extension number of a PS Ring Group, VM Group, External Pager [TAFAS], or DISA) in each
time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

470 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Host PBX Access Code

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

Host PBX Access Code 1–10

Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Collect Call Reject (For Brazil)

Group Name
Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

PC Programming Manual 471

2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

None

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode

Enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls. This setting is only for users in Brazil.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time

Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This
setting is only for users in Brazil.

Value Range
500 ms, 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Flashing Time

Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call. This setting is only for
users in Brazil.

Value Range
1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms

472 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 473

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Trunk groups can be assigned a priority for Idle Line Access. When making a trunk call by Idle Line
Access, the PBX will search trunk groups for an idle trunk according to the priority assigned here.

Trunk Group No. & Name

Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level.
Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Trunk Group No. 1–64

For KX-TDA600:
Trunk Group No. 1–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

Programming Manual References

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

474 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk Group—Charge Rate

The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each
trunk group.

Trunk Group Name

Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Rate
Specifies the call charge rate.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk Group—Charge Rate

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

PC Programming Manual 475

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.4 [3-2] User Group

Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user
group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call
pickup groups and several paging groups. A maximum of 8 tenants can be programmed.

User Group Name

Specifies the name of the extension user group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.4 [3-2] User Group

Programming Manual References

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—User Group
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—User Group

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.4 [3-2] User Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service

476 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One
extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) call pickup groups can be programmed.
To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group

Pickup Group—1st–8th
Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group
can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen. To assign an extension user
group to more than 8 call pickup groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 01–64

For KX-TDA600:
None, 01–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 477

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.6 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting

Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One
extension user group can belong to multiple call pickup groups.

Call Pickup Group Name

Specifies the name of the call pickup group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.6 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group

User Group 1–32 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600)

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.6 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
2.2.2 Group

478 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External
pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can
belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or
96 (with the KX-TDA600) paging groups can be programmed.
To assign external pagers to paging groups, click External Pager. To assign extension user groups
to paging groups easily, click All Setting.

User Group Name

Indicates the name of the extension user group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group

Paging Group—1st–8th
Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to. One extension user group can
be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on this screen. To assign an extension user group to
more than 8 paging groups, click All Setting.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 01–32

For KX-TDA600:
None, 01–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

PC Programming Manual 479

2.9 [3] Group

2.2.2 Group

480 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting

Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. One
extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups.

Paging Group Name

Specifies the name of the paging group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group

User Group 1–32 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600)

Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON, OFF

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 481

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.9 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging
groups.

Paging Group Name

Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.9 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group

External Pager 1
Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.9 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group

External Pager 2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group.

Value Range
ON (blue), OFF

482 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.9 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
2.2.2 Group

PC Programming Manual 483

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming
call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128
incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.4.7
Tool—Extension List View). To assign extensions to ICD groups and change extension settings,
click Member List.
For more information on ICD Groups, see "1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—
SUMMARY" in the Feature Guide.

Main

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers
of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

484 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

None

Distribution Method
Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Call Waiting Distribution

Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
All, Distribution

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

FWD Mode
Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call
distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

PC Programming Manual 485

2.9 [3] Group

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

DND Mode
Specifies whether extensions in DND mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call
distribution group.

Value Range
No Ring, Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time
Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table
number.)

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—Music On Hold

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold
2.2.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain
extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are

486 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call
distribution group applies.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Feature Guide References

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

CLIP on ICD Group Button

Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Overflow Queuing Busy

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers
of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 487

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity

Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue.

Value Range
None, 1–30

488 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Overflow No Answer

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers
of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 489

2.9 [3] Group

Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break,

Night
Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by
Manual Queue Redirection in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Overflow Time

Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination.

Value Range
None, 10 × n (n=1–125) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Hurry-up Level
Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by
flashing the Hurry-up button.

Value Range
None, 1–30

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

490 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers
of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 491

2.9 [3] Group

Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, Table 1–Table 64

For KX-TDA600:
None, Table 1–Table 128

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing

Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the
call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued.

Value Range
Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Miscellaneous

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers
of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

492 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Extension No Answer Redirection Time

Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next
member extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution
method.

Value Range
None, 10 × n (n=1–15) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

PC Programming Manual 493

2.9 [3] Group

No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out

Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically
logged out from the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
None, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Maximum No. of Busy Extensions

Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call
distribution group.

Value Range
Max: Call arrives at an idle extension.
1–32 : Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the
assigned number.

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Last Extension Log-out

Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log
out.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

494 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

VIP Call Mode

Enables VIP Call mode, to prioritise calls received from multiple incoming call distribution groups.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.5 VIP Call

Supervisor Extension Number

Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group's supervisor. The supervisor
can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6-line display PT. The
supervisor extension need not belong to the group.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

Programmed Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group's mailbox for Voice Processing
Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

PC Programming Manual 495

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Group Log / Group FWD

To set extension numbers easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group.
Note that groups that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers
of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Group Name
Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

496 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

None

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged
in the call log memory.

Value Range
0–100

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

Group FWD Call from CO—Setting

Sets or cancels the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution
group.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from CO—Destination

Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution
group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

PC Programming Manual 497

2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from Extension—Setting

Sets or cancels the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution
group.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Group FWD Call from Extension—Destination

Specifies the forward destination of incoming intercom calls directed to the incoming call distribution
group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret] and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

498 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time

Table
A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are
handled. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-
TDA600) Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16

Specifies the command activated by the corresponding sequence.

Value Range
None: Redirects the call to the next sequence
Overflow: Redirects the call to the overflow destination when there is no answer
Disconnect: Disconnects the line
Sequence 01–16: Redirects the call to a different sequence
Wait 5 × n (n=1–16) s: If preceded by an OGM, plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of
time; if not preceded by an OGM, sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time.

KX-TDA30:
OGM 01–32: Sends a certain OGM

KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
OGM 01–64: Sends a certain OGM

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature
1.13.4 Music on Hold
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

PC Programming Manual 499

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed.

Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the
group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—ICD Group Key Mode

Selects whether ICD Group buttons at extensions operate as normal or in Enhanced Phantom button
mode.
When set to Enhanced Phantom mode, creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT
personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group.
The extension user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.

Value Range
Group DN, Enhanced Phantom

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member—Delayed Ring

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required)

Selects whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the
extension that has been idle the longest (ACD).

500 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Value Range
Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used.
If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution
Group—Member becomes unavailable. If ICD Group Member is selected, Wrap-up Timer on
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—
Extension Settings become unavailable.

Value Range
Extension: The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on
hold.
ICD Group Member: The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member—Wrap-up Timer
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Wrap-up Timer
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Wrap-up Timer

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

PC Programming Manual 501

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member

Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member
can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of
multiple incoming call distribution groups. An ICD Group can also contain cellular phones, and
network ICD groups (ICD groups at other PBXs in a network) using virtual PS (see "1.25.6 Virtual
PS" in the Feature Guide). The forward destination assigned to a virtual PS (e.g., a cellular phone)
can act as a member of an ICD group. Select the desired ICD group (1–128) from the ICD Group No.
list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6
Extension Number Setting). To copy the members to another group, click Member List Copy,
select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of each member. In addition to the extension numbers of PT, SLT, PS,
and T1-OPX extensions, floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member

Programming Manual References

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member

Programming Manual References

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

502 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features—SUMMARY

Delayed Ring
Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method
of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.)

Value Range
Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before the member extension can
accept another call.
This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "ICD Group Member" in
2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
10 × n (n=0–300) s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member

Programming Manual References

2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Wrap-up Timer
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Wrap-up Timer

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

PC Programming Manual 503

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

If an extension within an idle extension hunting group is called when it is busy or in DND mode, the
call can be redirected to another extension in the same hunting group, according to a preprogrammed
hunting type. If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow
destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum
of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) hunting groups can
be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To assign extensions as overflow destinations
easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Hunting Group Name

Specifies the name of the hunting group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Hunting Type
Specifies the hunting type for the hunting group.

Value Range
Circular: Circulates until the call is answered or overflowed
Terminated: Terminates at the last extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
2.2.2 Group

Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode.

504 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

PC Programming Manual 505

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the
Hunting Group No. list.
To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click
Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy numbers to another
group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the hunting group member.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Extension Number
above (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

Feature Guide References

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

506 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports
of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.
With the KX-TDA30, a maximum of 1 VM (DPT) Group can be programmed; with the KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200, 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed; and with the KX-TDA600, 8 VM (DPT) groups
can be programmed.

Call Waiting on VM Group

Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DPT) group are busy. (Call Waiting
tone is not sent to any VM port.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Intercept to Mailbox
Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is
redirected to the VM (DPT) group by Intercept Routing. When the VPS receives the mailbox number,
the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Intercept (not available for MPR Software File Version
3.1000 or later)—Intercept Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (not available for MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When called
party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

PC Programming Manual 507

2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Transfer Recall to Mailbox

Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these
situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement
feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within
a programmed time period; (2) when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a
certain extension. When the VPS receives the mailbox number, the VPS answers the call with the
appropriate mailbox.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

508 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for
redirected calls and incoming calls.
To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed
extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Floating Extension No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DPT) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call
the VM (DPT) group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual 509

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—
Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) of 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port will be displayed. In addition,
the other information displayed here can also be set in 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

VM Unit No.
Indicates the unit number of the connected VPS (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1

510 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1, 2

For KX-TDA600:
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

VM Port No.
Indicates the VM port number for the port (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–4

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
1–12

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Extension No.
Indicates the extension number assigned to the VM port (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 511

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.18 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

512 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports
of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum
of 2 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 8 (with the KX-TDA600) VM (DTMF) Groups
can be programmed.
For more information on Voice Mail groups and DTMF integration, see "1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group"
and "1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration" in the Feature Guide.

VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is ringing.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the dialled number is invalid.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

PC Programming Manual 513

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—DND tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND
mode.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered
the call.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message
Waiting) has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension.

514 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the
VPS and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 515

2.9 [3] Group

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the
VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone

Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to
another extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Command—Recording Message

Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded, intercepted, or
transferred to the VPS, so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

516 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Command—Listening Message

Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a
message waiting notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in
a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Message Waiting

VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA
Service Mode.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM
Service Mode.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, H [mailbox number], and P [pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

PC Programming Manual 517

2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Timing—DTMF Length for VM

Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Timing—Inter-digit Time
Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS.

Value Range
80 ms, 160 ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the
VPS has answered a call.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

518 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal

Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS
after the VPS has finished dialling.

Value Range
0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Others—Call Waiting on VM Group

Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting
tone is not sent to any VM port.)

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence

Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is forwarded to the
VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also
possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.

Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA

PC Programming Manual 519

2.9 [3] Group

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence

Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the
VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode. It is also
possible to send no DTMF signal to the VPS.

Value Range
None, Answer by Mailbox, AA

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Others—Mailbox for Extension

Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call
distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call
distribution group.

Value Range
Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—Programmed
Mailbox No.
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.

Feature Guide References

None

520 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control

Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the
MESSAGE button light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the
VPS.

Value Range
By PBX, By VM

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 521

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for
redirected calls and incoming calls.
To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension
numbers and types, click Extension List View.

Floating Ext. No.

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) group.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the VM (DTMF) group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that
call the VM (DTMF) group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Type
Specifies the initial service mode in which the VPS answers calls.

522 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

Value Range
AA, VM

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

PC Programming Manual 523

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.21 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List

Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list.
To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6
Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select
the group, and click OK.

Extension Number of the SLT Port Connected to VM

Specifies the extension number assigned to the SLT port that is connected to the VPS.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.21 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.21 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

524 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating
extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS
ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions.
To add PSs to the PS Ring Group, click Member List.

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the PS ring group.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.2 PS Ring Group

Group Name
Specifies the name of the PS ring group, which will be shown on the display of extensions that call
the PS ring group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called
Number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.2 PS Ring Group

PC Programming Manual 525

2.9 [3] Group

Incoming Trunk Call Information Display

Specifies the information of the incoming trunk call to be shown on the displays of the PSs that belong
to the PS ring group. If the caller's name or called party's name is not recognised, the telephone
number will be shown.

Value Range
Caller ID, Called Number

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.2 PS Ring Group

526 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List

Each PS Ring Group can have up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)
or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS
Ring Group Number list.
To assign members to the PS Ring Group, enter directly or click Extension Number Setting (see
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy,
select the group, and click OK.

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.25.2 PS Ring Group

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.25.2 PS Ring Group

PC Programming Manual 527

2.9 [3] Group

2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

A broadcasting group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a
broadcasting call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple broadcasting groups.
Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 broadcasting groups. To assign members to a group,
click Member List.

Broadcasting Group—Name
Specifies the name of the broadcasting group.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

528 PC Programming Manual

 2.9 [3] Group

2.9.25 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List

Up to 31 members can be assigned to each broadcasting group. Select the group to programme from
the Broadcasting Group Number list.
To copy the numbers to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group to copy to, and click
OK.

Dial Number
Specifies the destination number of each member of the broadcasting group.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.25 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension, when an extension number is specified in Dial Number above
(reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.9.25 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.16.1 Broadcasting

PC Programming Manual 529

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are
displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned.
To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants
to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 2.9.4 [3-2] User Group for more
details.
Note that the order if items in this section corresponds to MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later
of the Maintenance Console. If using an earlier version, please refer to the PC Programming Manual
that came with that version, or look for the relevant parameter in this section by name, not by position.

Main

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

530 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 531

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port Type
Indicates the extension port type (reference only).

Value Range
DPT: DPT port (DLC)
SLT: SLT port (SLC/ESLC/EMSLC)
S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
ISDN: ISDN port (BRI)

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only:

ISDN: ISDN port (PRI)
OPX: T1-OPX port (T1)
IP-Ext: IP-Extension port (IP-EXT)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

Telephone Type
Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port (reference only).

Value Range
DPT (15V)/DPT (40V): DPT is connected.
APT (15V): APT is connected.
DSS: DSS Console is connected.
VM: VPS is connected.
SLT: SLT is connected (or no telephone is connected to the Super Hybrid or SLT port).
ISDN-Ext: ISDN telephone is connected.
No Connection: No telephone is connected.
CS: CS is connected.
IP-EXT: IP-PT is connected. (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

532 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used
to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–32

For KX-TDA600:
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the extension.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

PC Programming Manual 533

2.10 [4] Extension

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party
discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or
extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) Keeping PINs secret.
b) Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c) Changing PINs frequently.

Intercept Destination

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

534 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 535

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,

Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No
Answer and Intercept Routing–DND (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later) or Intercept
Routing–Busy/DND (all other MPR Software File Versions) or features.
Note that with MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed
using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later) below.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—Intercept Destination—
When Called Party is Busy (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

536 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy (MPR Software File

Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept No Answer Time

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 537

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

538 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (MPR Software File

Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination
in each time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

Value Range
0–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—
Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

ISDN CLIP

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 539

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.

540 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party's telephone display
when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 541

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party's telephone.

Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port or
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—ISDN CO—Subscriber Number
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—Subscriber
Number
2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party's telephone when
making a public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the extension on the caller's telephone
display when answering a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

542 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Option 1

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 543

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

544 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Wireless XDP
Specifies the extension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established. To
enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after
assigning this setting.
When changing the port type of an extension port in DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
on the 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port screen, the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Ring Pattern Table

Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Programmed Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the extension's mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with
DTMF Integration.

PC Programming Manual 545

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Transfer Recall Destination

Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer
without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the
extension for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

546 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Option 2

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 547

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

548 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.

Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
W-OHCA: Voice from the handset

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting
1.8.4.1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension—SUMMARY

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notifications for calls from a trunk, doorphone calls, and calls
via an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Pickup Dial Set

Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is
dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 549

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Pickup Dial No.

Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is
active.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Data Mode
Sets or cancels the protection against tones or interruptions from other extensions during
communication.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.5 Data Line Security

Option 3

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

550 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".

PC Programming Manual 551

2.10 [4] Extension

When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Call Pickup Deny

Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

552 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Executive Override Deny

Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be
customised for each extension.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the
extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

PC Programming Manual 553

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

Intercom Call by Voice

Selects the method of receiving intercom calls. When Deny Voice Call is selected, the extension will
always ring when receiving calls, regardless of how the caller wants to make the call.

Value Range
Tone Call, Voice Call, Deny Voice Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.3 Intercom Call

Option 4

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

554 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 555

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Outgoing Preferred Line

Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.

Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-36: A trunk programmed for a flexible CO button (F-1–F-36) is seized. A flexible CO button
customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

556 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Incoming Preferred Line

Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the
extension will be answered when going off-hook.

Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-36: The call arriving at a flexible CO button (F-1–F-36) is selected. A flexible CO button
customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

LCS Recording Mode

Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension's mailbox when the
extension user answers a call that was being monitored.

Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 557

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

LCS Answer Mode

Specifies whether the extension's mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode.

Value Range
Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker
Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.1 Hands-free Operation
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Option 5

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

558 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

PC Programming Manual 559

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Display Language
Selects the display language of the extension telephone.

Value Range
Language1–Language5

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information

Incoming Call Display

Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension's display.

Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

560 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information

Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information

Key Pad Tone

Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when dialling.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Automatic Answer for CO Call

Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings
without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is
only effective when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 561

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

Option 6

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

562 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 563

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Forced Automatic Answer

Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk
calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible CO buttons without limitation, or only the
One-touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2"
before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.

Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

ICM Tone
Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons.
Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension.

Value Range
KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/NT136: 1–30
KX-T7665/NT265: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
Other telephones: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 2 is heard.)

564 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Incoming Call Log Lock (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log display (i.e., specifies whether other extension users can see
the Incoming Call Log information at the extension).

Value Range
Unlock, Lock

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

Display Lock / SVM Lock (KX-TDA30 only)

Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display (i.e., specifies
whether other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the
extension).

Value Range
Unlock, Lock

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Paging Deny
Specifies whether paging of the extension from other extensions is enabled.

PC Programming Manual 565

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging

Option 7

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

566 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

PC Programming Manual 567

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Character Input Mode

Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.

Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash Mode during CO Conversation

Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.

Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the extension's Incoming Call Log
memory.

568 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
0–100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the
extension's Outgoing Call Log memory.

Value Range
1–100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically
depending on the extension's telephone type as follows:
PT: Speech
SLT: Audio

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

PC Programming Manual 569

2.10 [4] Extension

Option 8

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

570 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 571

2.10 [4] Extension

Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)

Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension
at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Caller ID Sending

Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT.
Note that for KX-TDA30, the setting of this parameter is only effective when a resource for sending
extension Caller ID is assigned in Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only) for the port
in 2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings—Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID

Specifies the length of time that the ringing for a call is delayed when the call follows immediately after
the previous unanswered call. When receiving two calls in quick succession (e.g., when a call waiting
in a queue is directed to an extension immediately after the previous unanswered call stops ringing),
some SLTs require a pause, after the first call stops ringing, to receive the second call's Caller ID
information.
Note that for the KX-TDA30, the setting of this parameter is only effective when a resource for sending
extension Caller ID is assigned in Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only) for the port
in 2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings.

Value Range
0–15 s

572 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings—Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

SLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port.

Value Range
Disable, MW-Lamp

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.1 Message Waiting

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept
another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 2.9.12 [3-5-
3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

Value Range
0–3000 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member—Wrap-up Timer
2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

PC Programming Manual 573

2.10 [4] Extension

Option 9

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

574 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 575

2.10 [4] Extension

PDN Delayed Ringing (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN
buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

FWD / DND Reference

Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred. FWD
and DND settings can be programmed separately for each extension in 2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired
Extension—FWD/DND.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

576 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Specifies the extension number of the extension.
To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below:
1. Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
2. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use. If the extension
number is changed while the port is in use, the new extension number will not come into effect.
Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension
numbers of 2–4 digits.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.6 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Port Command

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 577

2.10 [4] Extension

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the extension.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

FWD Set for Call from CO

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

DND Set for Call from CO

Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

578 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

FWD Mode for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Set for Call from Extension

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 579

2.10 [4] Extension

DND Set for Call from Extension

Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

FWD Mode for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

580 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

FWD No Answer Time

Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded
(reference only).

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 581

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP

Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
Wired extension number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location Entry—Number to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions, even if the number entered here
is larger than the total number of wired extensions.

Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as
part of the CLIP number.

582 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
0–4

For KX-TDA600:
0–5

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual 583

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be
programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension
Number / Name list.

Call from CO—Present Button Status

Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Call from CO—FWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward
settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from CO—DND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

584 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Call from CO—FWD Mode

Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded.

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from CO—FWD Destination

Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from Extension—Present Button Status

Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

PC Programming Manual 585

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward
settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from Extension—DND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for intercom calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Call from Extension—FWD Mode

Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.

586 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from Extension—FWD Destination

Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Timer

Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded.

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 587

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial

Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit
speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 10 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be
programmed for each extension, or 100 when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or
EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number /
Name list.
If an MEC/EMEC card is installed, the available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets of 20.
Select the desired set from the Personal Speed Dialling No. list.

Speed Dialling Name

Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling
Directory shown on the extension's display.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Dialling Number
Specifies the number to be dialled by the Personal Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

588 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Each flexible CO button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A
maximum of 36 flexible CO buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.
To copy the flexible CO button settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy To.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible CO button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/
DND (Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External),
Group Fwd (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-
out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN
Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out,
Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later), SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy

Feature Guide References

None

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–16

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128

For KX-TDA600:
1–640

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 589

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–64

For KX-TDA600:
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or
logged out from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

590 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.

Value Range
1–7

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to automatic.

Value Range
1–8

PC Programming Manual 591

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

592 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution
group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the extension will check its own
messages only.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom
and trunk calls are forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 593

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls
are forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

594 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)

Specifies the extension's own number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution
group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the extension will display its
own call log information.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out
from.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

PC Programming Manual 595

2.10 [4] Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting
call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the extension's mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

596 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to
function.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 597

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and
DSS Consoles.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company's ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key
Table can be specified here.

598 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later))
Specifies the ring tone type.

Value Range
1–30

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 599

2.10 [4] Extension

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
0–99

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Extension No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-
touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a
boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

600 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible Button

Data Copy
The flexible CO button settings of an extension can be copied to different extensions.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions
can be selected. To select all extensions at once, click Select All.
With MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, when selecting multiple extensions, note that if the
source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy

Programming Manual References

2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 601

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button

Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one
touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired
extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

Type
Specifies whether to store a dialling number for the one-touch access.

Value Range
Not Stored, One Touch

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.2 Flexible Buttons

Dial
Specifies the number to be dialled.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.2 Flexible Buttons

602 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send

It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension's status data over the network. Select the
desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX
ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This
setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from
ON to OFF, to cancel data transmission.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 603

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-

TDA30 only)
When an SVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be
provided for each extension.
This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number
of messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(SVM)" in the Feature Guide.

Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

604 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Simplified Voice Message

Selects which SVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific SVM card, and can only use the assigned card. If two
SVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to
ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each
extension.

Value Range
None, Card1, Card2

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 605

2.10 [4] Extension

Maximum SVM Log

Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be
stored for the extension.

Value Range
1–100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

606 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 28 (with
the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PSs can be
programmed.
To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See
2.9.4 [3-2] User Group for more details.
Note that the order if items in this section corresponds to MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later
of the Maintenance Console. If using an earlier version, please refer to the PC Programming Manual
that came with that version, or look for the relevant parameter in this section by name, not by position.

Main

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Property
Indicates the property (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 607

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Portable Station

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

User Group
Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to
compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–32

For KX-TDA600:
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group
2.2.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the COS of the PS.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

608 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Extension PIN
Specifies the PIN of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party
discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or
extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) Keeping PINs secret.
b) Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c) Changing PINs frequently.

Intercept Destination

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension No.

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 609

2.10 [4] Extension

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch,

Break, Night
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No
Answer and Intercept Routing–DND (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later) or Intercept
Routing–Busy/DND (all other MPR Software File Versions) or features.
Note that with MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, Intercept Routing–Busy calls are routed
using Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later) below.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination—Intercept
Destination—When Called Party is Busy (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy (MPR Software File

Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

610 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept No Answer Time

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension No.

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (MPR Software File

Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination
in each time mode.
When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used.

PC Programming Manual 611

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
0–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—
Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

ISDN CLIP

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension No.

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

612 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

CLIP ID
Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party's telephone display
when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIP on Extension/CO
Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party's telephone.

Value Range
Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab.
CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port or
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—ISDN CO—Subscriber Number
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—Subscriber
Number
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—CLIP ID

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

CLIR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party's telephone when
making a public network trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 613

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

COLR
Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller's telephone display
when answering a call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Option 1

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

614 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Ring Pattern Table

Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Programmed Mailbox No.

Specifies the mailbox number of the PS's mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF
Integration.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Transfer Recall Destination

Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfer
without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period.

PC Programming Manual 615

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.12.1 Call Transfer

ARS Itemised Code

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS
for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Option 2

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

616 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions.

Value Range
Off: No notification
BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Automatic C. Waiting
Specifies whether to receive call waiting notification for a call from trunk, a doorphone call or a call
via an incoming call distribution group.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 617

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Pickup Dial Set

Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is
dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Pickup Dial No.

Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is
active.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Option 3

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

618 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Call Pickup Deny

Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS
Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Executive Override Deny

Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions.

PC Programming Manual 619

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Disable: Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call
Enable: Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Absent Message
Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be
customised for each PS.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Absent Message

Charge Limit
Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the PS. When this limit is reached, the PS
cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

620 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Option 4

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Outgoing Preferred Line

Selects the line to be seized after going off-hook to make a call.

Value Range
No Line: No line is seized.
Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
ICM/PDN: An extension line is seized, or, for a PDN extension, an idle PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a flexible CO button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible CO button
customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 621

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Incoming Preferred Line

Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook.
Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the
extension will be answered when going off-hook.

Value Range
No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call.
Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected.
PDN: The call arriving at any PDN button is selected.
F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible CO button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible CO button
customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Call Waiting Tone Type

Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension.

Value Range
CW Tone 1, CW Tone 2

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

LCS Recording Mode

Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS's mailbox when the PS user
answers a call that was being monitored.

622 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
Stop Record, Keep Record

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Option 5

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 623

2.10 [4] Extension

Display Language
Selects the display language of the PS.

Value Range
Language1–Language5

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information

Incoming Call Display

Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS's display.

Value Range
Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information

Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information

624 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Option 6

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Flexible Button Programming Mode

Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible CO buttons without limitation, or only the One-
touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before
the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.

Value Range
No Limitation, One-touch Dial

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 625

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

SVM Lock (KX-TDA30 only)

Selects whether Simplified Voice Message Log information can be displayed at the extension or other
extensions.

Value Range
Lock, Unlock

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Option 7

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

626 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Character Input Mode

Selects the character table to be used for entering characters.

Value Range
Table 1: Standard mode
Table 2: Option mode

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Flash Mode during CO Conversation

Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation.

Value Range
EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Incoming Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of incoming trunk calls that are retained in the PS's Incoming Call Log memory.

Value Range
0–100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 627

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

Outgoing Call Log Memory

Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS's Outgoing
Call Log memory.

Value Range
1–100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

ISDN Bearer
Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically
depending on the type of the PS.

Value Range
Automatic, Speech, Audio

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

Option 8

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

628 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call)

Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension
at the moment that the extension goes on-hook for the previous call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Wrap-up Timer
Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call
when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 2.9.12 [3-5-
3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.

PC Programming Manual 629

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
0–3000 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member—Wrap-up Timer
2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Option 9

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

630 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

PDN Delayed Ringing (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN
buttons).

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

FWD / DND Reference

Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred. FWD and
DND settings can be programmed separately for each PS in 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD
/ DND.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Specifies the name of the PS.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 631

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

FWD Set for Call from CO

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

DND Set for Call from CO

Indicates the current DND status for incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

FWD Mode for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

632 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from CO

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Set for Call from Extension

Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

DND Set for Call from Extension

Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Off, On

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 633

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

FWD Mode for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD Destination for Call from Extension

Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Time

Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded (reference
only).

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

634 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 635

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP

Generate
CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together.
Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten.
If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded.

Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext. Number)

Specifies the extension number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
PS extension number

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Location Entry—Number to Generate

Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.
A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions, even if the number entered here is
larger than the total number of PS extensions.

Value Range
1–total number of connected wired extensions

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Deleting Digits
Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of an extension number when using it as
part of the CLIP number.

Value Range
0–4

636 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Head of ID
Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Parameter—Tail of ID
Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate

Programming Manual References

2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

PC Programming Manual 637

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be
programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension
Number / Name list.

Call from CO—Present Button Status

Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Call from CO—FWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward
settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from CO—DND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

638 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Call from CO—FWD Mode

Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded.

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from CO—FWD Destination

Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from Extension—Present Button Status

Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—Internal button.

Value Range
OFF, FWD, DND

PC Programming Manual 639

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY

Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability

Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward
settings have been programmed.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from Extension—DND Status Availability

Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
OFF: Enables extensions to switch to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.
ON: Prevents extensions from switching to DND mode by pressing the FWD/DND button.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Call from Extension—FWD Mode

Specifies the circumstances when incoming intercom calls are forwarded.

640 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call from Extension—FWD Destination

Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

FWD No Answer Timer

Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded.

Value Range
0–120 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

PC Programming Manual 641

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Each flexible CO button can be customised to allow one-touch access to a certain feature. A
maximum of 12 flexible CO buttons can be customised for each PS. Select the desired PS from the
Extension Number / Name list.
To copy values from one location to another, click the Copy To button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/
DND (Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External),
Group Fwd (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out,
Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time
Service - Automatic/Manual, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS,
CTI, PDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later), SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.10.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy

Feature Guide References

None

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–16

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128

For KX-TDA600:
1–640

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

642 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–64

For KX-TDA600:
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically, or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to are logged in to or logged out
from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

PC Programming Manual 643

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain PS.

Value Range
1–7

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic / Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to automatic.

Value Range
1–8

644 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.
The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
(MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later) on 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable".

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (MPR
Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 645

2.10 [4] Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution
group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the PS will check its own messages
only.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom
and trunk calls are forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

646 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls
are forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 647

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out
from.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting
call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

648 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the PS's mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 649

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later)
Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to
function.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

650 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company's ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key
Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

PC Programming Manual 651

2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for SDN) (MPR Software
File Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the ring tone type.

Value Range
1–30

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
0–99

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-
touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a
boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

652 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual 653

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible Button

Data Copy
The flexible CO button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs.

Destination Extension Line

Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be
selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.
With MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, when selecting multiple extensions, note that if the
source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy

Programming Manual References

2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

None

654 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension's status data over the network. Select the
desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX
ID=1)
Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension. This
setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used, and can only be manually changed from
ON to OFF, to cancel data transmission.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

Programming Manual References

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 655

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-

TDA30 only)
When an SVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be
provided for each PS.
This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number
of messages that can be stored for each extension.
For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message
(SVM)" in the Feature Guide.

Extension Number
Indicates the extension number (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station

Feature Guide References

None

Extension Name
Indicates the name of the extension (reference only).

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Extension Name

Feature Guide References

None

Simplified Voice Message

Selects which SVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension.
Each extension must be assigned to a specific SVM card, and can only use the assigned card. If two
SVM cards are installed in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to

656 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each
extension.

Value Range
None, Card1, Card2

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Maximum of SVM Log

Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be
stored for the extension.

Value Range
1–100

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

PC Programming Manual 657

2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 4 (with the KX-TDA30), 8 (with
the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 64 (with the KX-TDA600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The
DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port) of the extension port that DSS Console is connected
must be set to DSS in 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port.
Each flexible DSS button can be customised to access a certain feature. A maximum of 66 flexible
DSS buttons can be customised for each DSS Console. Select the desired DSS Console from the
DSS Console No. list.
To copy DSS Console setting values from one location to another, click the Copy To button.
For more information on flexible buttons, see "1.20.2 Flexible Buttons" in the Feature Guide.

Pair Extension
Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console.
Note that with MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, if one or more SDN buttons have been set
at the DSS Console, they must be deleted before this setting can be changed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
None, Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Type
Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible DSS button.

Value Range
Not Stored, Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, DSS, One-touch, ICD Group, Message Waiting, FWD/
DND (Both), FWD/DND (External), FWD/DND (Internal), Group Fwd (Both), Group Fwd (External),
Group Fwd (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Call Log, Log-in/Log-
out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN
Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out,
Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, SDN (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

658 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

2.10.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Flexible button Data Copy

Feature Guide References

1.20.2 Flexible Buttons

Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

Specifies the trunk to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–16

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–128

For KX-TDA600:
1–640

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

Specifies the trunk group to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–64

For KX-TDA600:
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

PC Programming Manual 659

2.10 [4] Extension

Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone.

Value Range
Automatic, Specific

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in
to or logged out from.

Value Range
None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually.
All: All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to.
Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

Selects which time modes are switched manually.

Value Range
All (Day/Night/Lunch/Break), Day/Night/Break, Day/Night/Lunch, Day/Night

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

660 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Specifies the TRS/Barring level to be used temporarily on a certain extension.

Value Range
1–7

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to automatic.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button.

Value Range
Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 661

2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS)

Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Message Waiting)

Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution
group for which messages are checked. If this cell is left empty, the paired extension will check its own
messages only.

662 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom
and trunk calls are forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are
forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 663

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls
are forwarded.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)

Specifies the paired extension's number or the floating extension number of an incoming call
distribution group for which call log information is displayed. If the cell is left empty, the paired
extension will display its own call log information.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

664 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)

Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out
from.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)

Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting
call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the paired extension's
mailbox.

PC Programming Manual 665

2.10 [4] Extension

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

666 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later)
Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button.
Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to
function.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Dial (for One-touch)

Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and
DSS Consoles.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

PC Programming Manual 667

2.10 [4] Extension

Dial (for ISDN Service)

Specifies the number required to access the telephone company's ISDN service.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

Dial (for NDSS)

Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station
Selection.
Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key
Table can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

668 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

Feature Guide References

2.2.4 Time Service

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO,
Group CO, ICD Group, SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later))
Specifies the ring tone type.

Value Range
1–30

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with
Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.

Value Range
0–99

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.13.2 Call Park

Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-
touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a
boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 669

2.10 [4] Extension

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

670 PC Programming Manual

 2.10 [4] Extension

2.10.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Flexible button Data

Copy
The flexible DSS button settings of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select
the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./
Pair Extension list, then click Copy To.

Destination DSS Console

Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension. Multiple DSS Consoles can be
selected. To select all DSS Consoles at once, click Select All.
With MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later, when selecting multiple extensions, note that if the
source extension has an SDN button, the copy operation cannot be performed.

Maintenance Console Location

2.10.18 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Flexible button Data Copy

Programming Manual References

2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 671

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed.
To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).

Physical—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Physical—Slot
Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Slot number

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Slot and sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Physical—Port
Indicates the port number to which the doorphone is connected (reference only).

672 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Name
Specifies the doorphone name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/
night).

PC Programming Manual 673

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call
2.2.3 Tenant Service

COS
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports
that are able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions
(Internal Call Block).

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block

Feature Guide References

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
1.17.1 Doorphone Call

VM Trunk Group Number

Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the doorphone call destination is
the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) group.
The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to
the caller.

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone

Programming Manual References

None

674 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

1.17.1 Doorphone Call
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual 675

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified.
Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.4.7
Tool—Extension List View).

Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Name

Specifies the name of the external pager.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.15.1 Paging
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

676 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the
caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX.
For more information on DISA, see "1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature
Guide.

Option 1

DISA Security—DISA Security Mode

Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX. In Trunk or All Security
mode, the caller is required to override security by Walking COS or Verification Code Entry in order
to enable the restricted feature temporarily.

Value Range
None: Intercom calls, TIE line calls, and trunk calls can be made.
Trunk: Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made. TIE line calls with PBX code
and trunk calls are restricted.
All: All calls are restricted.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.5 Walking COS
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

DISA Security—Remote Walking COS through DISA without PIN (Optional

SD Card Required)
Enables registered caller ID numbers to be automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling
through DISA, and to use the Walking COS features without entering a PIN.

Value Range
Disable, Enable (Get DISA)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 677

2.11 [5] Optional Device

DISA Intercept—Intercept when Destination through DISA is Busy (not

available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination is busy, and disables Call Waiting, FWD, or Idle
Extension Hunting.

Value Range
Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Intercept—Intercept when Destination through DISA sets DND

Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting.

Value Range
Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use.

Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Busy Tone)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

678 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers (MPR Software

File Version 3.1000 or later)
Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any option from the menu.

Value Range
to Operator, to AA-0, to AA-9, Disable (Reorder Tone)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO

Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call
using DISA is established. To enable this setting, "CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO"
on this screen should be set to "Enable".
Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end
of a call and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk
call using DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public
CO

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network

Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk call
using DISA is established.
To enable this setting, "CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network" on this screen should
be set to "Enable".

PC Programming Manual 679

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Setting this to "Disable" will free up DISA ports faster, but prevent DISA being used to detect the end
of a call and disconnect the trunk quickly.

Value Range
Disable (Release DISA): The DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-private trunk
call using DISA is established.
Enable: DISA stays connected for the duration of the call, to allow detection of the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to
Private Network

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO

Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA.

Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to
detect the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network

Enables trunk-to-private trunk calls to be established using DISA.

Value Range
Disable: Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established without using DISA.
Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-private trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used
to detect the end of the call.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

680 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private
Network

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Optional SD Card Required)

Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension
within the PBX by dialling "#" + extension number.

Value Range
Disable: "#" is ignored if dialled.
Enable (as "Flash"): The current trunk call will be placed on hold, then transferred to the extension
whose number is entered.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"

Enables a trunk caller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing " " while hearing a ringback,
reorder, or busy tone. If disabled, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ".

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 681

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Option 2

DISA Cyclic Tone Detection

Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call
for a DISA trunk-to-trunk conversation established through an analogue trunk.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MSG card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is
fixed to 4 times in the ranges of:
A C C C

B D D D

A,B = 100–1300 ms, C = A 90 ms, D = B 90 ms

Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option
on this screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone
sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-
on.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to
"Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the MSG card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
100 + 10 × n (n=1–390) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

682 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone
company before recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the
PBX recognises it as a tone-off.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to
"Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
100 + 10 × n (n=1–390) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot
2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Feature Guide References

None

DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of On/Off for Detection

Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to
establish reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to
"Option".

Value Range
3–16

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

None

PC Programming Manual 683

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

None

Timed Reminder Message - Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the prerecorded message to play when a Timed Reminder call is answered in each time
mode.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
None, 1–32

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Programming Manual References

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Feature Guide References

1.28.4 Timed Reminder

684 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30)
or 64 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) OGMs can be programmed.
To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.4.7
Tool—Extension List View). To assign AA destinations easily, click Extension Number Setting
(see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number of the OGM.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Name
Specifies the name of the OGM.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

PC Programming Manual 685

2.11 [5] Optional Device

1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9

Specifies the destination for each DISA Automated Attendant (AA) number. After listening to an OGM,
the caller can be directed to the destination by dialling a 1-digit DISA AA number.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Busy / DND Message No.

Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
None, 1–32

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
None, 1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

Programming Manual References

2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Fax Extension (KX-TDA30 only)

Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when the MSG card detects a fax signal.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

686 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
1.17.7 Automatic Fax Transfer

PC Programming Manual 687

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Settings related to the SVM cards can be specified, for use with the Simplified Voice Message feature.

SVM Card No. 1, 2—Slot No.

Indicates the slot position (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Card No. 1, 2—Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM card.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Card No. 1, 2—Card Name

Specifies the name of the SVM card, for programming reference.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

688 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Recording Mode
Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the SVM card. Increasing the recording quality
reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.

Value Range
Low: About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
Middle: About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
High: About 40 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)
2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Remote Access
Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the
SVM feature. Using Walking COS, a user can access his or her message box remotely.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)
2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

PC Programming Manual 689

2.11 [5] Optional Device

SVM Cyclic Tone Detection

Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call
when an extension user records a greeting message or callers leave voice messages in a message
box.
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the SVM2 card to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is
fixed to 4 times in the ranges of:
A C C C

B D D D

A,B = 100–1300 ms, C = A 90 ms, D = B 90 ms

Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in SVM Cyclic Tone Option
on this screen.

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX. When the tone
sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-
on.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to
"Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the SVM2 card to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
200 + 20 × n (n=1–390) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

690 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time

Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone
company before recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the
PBX recognises it as a tone-off.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to
"Option".
To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below:
1. Change this setting.
2. Set the status of the SVM2 card to "OUS", then "INS".

Value Range
200 + 20 × n (n=1–390) ms

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of On/Off for Detection

Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to
establish reception of the cyclic tone. This determines the end of call.
Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to
"Option".

Value Range
3–16

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

PC Programming Manual 691

2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Settings related to external relays can be programmed.

External Relay No.

Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–4

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–16

KX-TDA600:
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

692 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Slot number

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Slot and sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

Name
Specifies the relay name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

PC Programming Manual 693

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Relay Activate Time

Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated.

Value Range
1–7 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.10 External Relay Control

COS Number
Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the extensions that are
able to activate relays.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extension—External Relay
Access

Feature Guide References

1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block
1.17.10 External Relay Control

694 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Settings related to external sensors can be programmed.
To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Extension Number of Destination Setting (see
2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

External Sensor No.

Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only).

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
1–4

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–16

KX-TDA600:
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Physical Location—Slot
Indicates the slot position (reference only).

PC Programming Manual 695

2.11 [5] Optional Device

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Slot number

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Slot and sub-slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Physical Location—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Name
Specifies the sensor name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

696 PC Programming Manual

 2.11 [5] Optional Device

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the destination number of sensor calls for each port in each time mode.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor

Tenant No.
Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The
tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.)

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.17.9 External Sensor
2.2.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 697

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who
should be automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI]
distribution). The System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or
receiving a call.
A maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature numbers) can
be programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To display other
sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

Memory
Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System
Speed Dialling Table or the additional table (with MEC [KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200] or
EMEC [KX-TDA600] card) depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory: additional table (only available when an MEC card is installed to the PBX)

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory for Tenant 1–8: additional tables (only available when an MEC/EMEC card is
installed to the PBX)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.18.1 Caller ID
2.2.3 Tenant Service

Name
Specifies a name for the System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

698 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.18.1 Caller ID

CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to
the System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.18.1 Caller ID

CLI Destination
Specifies the CLI destination (extension) to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone
number are routed. If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used, the modified number must match
the telephone number above (CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number) in order for the call
to be routed correctly.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL—CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table—CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution
1.18.1 Caller ID

PC Programming Manual 699

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically by a Caller ID Modification
Table, and then recorded for calling back.

Caller ID Modification
The PBX looks for incoming telephone numbers that begin with an area code programmed in the
Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group. If it finds such a code, it removes digits and
adds a number to the telephone number. If this modified telephone number is stored as a System
Speed Dialling number, the caller's name can be shown on a PT display and the call can be routed
to a certain extension (CLI destination). A maximum of 4 Caller ID Modification Tables, each
containing 10 local/international call data and 1 long distance code, can be programmed. Each trunk
group can select a table for use. Select the desired table from the Modification Table list.
If the telephone number does not contain an area code programmed here, it is modified based on the
Long Distance Code settings.

Area Code (for Local / International Call Data 1–10)

Specifies the leading number (area code) to look for in the incoming caller's number.

Value Range
Max. 6 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of digits to be removed from the beginning of the incoming caller's number.

Value Range
0–9

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Caller-ID Modification Table
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

700 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller's number in the place of the removed digits.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Caller-ID Modification Table
2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

ISDN CLIP Modification

When incoming caller information is sent through an ISDN line and the type of the network numbering
plan is International, National, or Subscriber, the caller's number can be modified as programmed in
the Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group. The modified number will then be recorded, and
it is used for sending to the network as a CLIP number.
A maximum of 4 ISDN CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed. Select the desired table from
the Modification Table list.

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming caller's number for each type
of network numbering plan.

Value Range
0–9

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Calling Party number—
Type of Number—Public, Private
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Called Party number—
Type of Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller's number in the place of the removed digits
for each type of network numbering plan.

PC Programming Manual 701

2.12 [6] Feature

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Programming Manual References

2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Calling Party number—
Type of Number—Public, Private
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Called Party number—
Type of Number—Public, Private

Feature Guide References

1.18.1 Caller ID

702 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension
in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes.
A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters. 100 codes
are displayed at a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Verification Code
Specifies the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

User Name
Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

Verification Code PIN

Specifies the PIN to be entered when making a trunk call with the verification code.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

PC Programming Manual 703

2.12 [6] Feature

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

WARNING
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party
discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or
extension PIN) of the PBX.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) Keeping PINs secret.
b) Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c) Changing PINs frequently.

COS Number
Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code.

Value Range
1–64

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

Feature Guide References

1.9.6 Verification Code Entry
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Itemised Billing Code for ARS

Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made with a
verification code for accounting and billing purposes.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

704 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Budget Management
Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code.
The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge
Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge.

Value Range
0–9999999

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

PC Programming Manual 705

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting
code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after
seizing a trunk, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.
A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed. 20 codes are displayed at
a time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Second Dial Tone Waiting Code

Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code.

Value Range
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

Pause Repeating Counter

Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial tone.

Value Range
0–20

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

706 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message

When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller's telephone display
describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any
extension user can select one of them.

Absent Message
Specifies the message for display.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.19.2 Absent Message

PC Programming Manual 707

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

A maximum of 8 tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user
groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources.
To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).

Music On Hold
Specifies the audio source to be used for Music on Hold.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Same as System Setting, BGM, Tone

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Same as System Setting, BGM 1, BGM 2, Tone

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

1.13.4 Music on Hold
2.2.3 Tenant Service

Operator (Extension Number)

Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group
to be designated as the tenant operator. When this parameter is left unspecified, the PBX operator
serves as the tenant operator.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM

Feature Guide References

2.2.3 Tenant Service

708 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

2.2.5 Operator Features

ARS Mode
Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call.

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle
Line Access method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any
Trunk Access method.
Same as System Setting: The setting specified in ARS Mode in 2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings is
applied.

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.2.3 Tenant Service

System Speed Dial

Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant. This setting is only available when
an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Basic Memory: PBX basic system speed dialling numbers are used.
Expanded Memory: Expansion system speed dialling numbers are used.

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600:
Same as System Setting: PBX common system speed dialling numbers are used.
Tenant Exclusive: Individual tenant system speed dialling numbers are used.

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System
2.2.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 709

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX
can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed
leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
When the PBX recognises the end of dialling to an analogue trunk, the PBX cancels the muting of
the caller's voice sent to the analogue trunk immediately. If the PBX cannot recognise the end of
dialling, the PBX mutes the caller's voice sent to an analogue trunk from the time at which the last
digit is dialled until the analogue trunk inter-digit timer expires.
4 tables can be programmed, each with a maximum of 50 leading numbers. Select the table to
programme from the Dialling Plan Table list.
To assign a set of leading numbers automatically, click Auto Assign.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, N [2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9], P [0, 1], and X [0-9, *, and #])

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue CO First Digit
2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit
2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Dialling Plan Table

Feature Guide References

1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY

710 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.8 [6-7] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign

It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically.

Select Auto Assigning Table

Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type
D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of
the dialling plan table.

Value Range
Type A: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type B: 1:N11, 2:NNX XXXX, 3:1NPX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored
Type C: 1:N11, 2:NXX XXXX, 3:1NNX XXXX, 4:1NPX NXX XXXX, 5-50: Not stored
Type D: 1-47: Not stored, 48:N11, 49:NXX XXXX, 50:1NXX NXX XXXX
Type E: 1:N11, 2:NXX NXX XXXX, 3:1NXX NXX XXXX, 4-50: Not stored

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.8 [6-7] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign

Programming Manual References

2.12.7 [6-7] Dialling Plan

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 711

2.12 [6] Feature

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set.

Main

Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4

Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.1 Hospitality Features—SUMMARY
1.27.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Room Status Control

Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.27.2 Room Status Control

SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

712 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.28.4 Timed Reminder

SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8

Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an
extension.
The "%" character can be used in a message, and requires a number to be entered in its place when
the message is selected from an extension. This character can be used a maximum of seven times
in a Printing Message.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.26.2 Printing Message

Bill

Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest (Need MEC Card)

Activates call billing features for the PBX. Call billing is only available when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed in the PBX.

Value Range
OFF, ON

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

PC Programming Manual 713

2.12 [6] Feature

Programming Manual References

2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"

Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when
entering room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Minibar"

Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when
entering room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—LCD for "Others"

Specifies the name of charge item 3 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when
entering room charges.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

714 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone"

Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Minibar"

Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others"

Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 12 characters

PC Programming Manual 715

2.12 [6] Feature

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)

Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing
feature.

Value Range
Language 1–Language 5

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Header 1–3

Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 80 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3

Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill.

Value Range
Max. 80 characters

716 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge

Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)

Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest telephone charges.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2.

PC Programming Manual 717

2.12 [6] Feature

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)

Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3.

Value Range
0.00–99.99 %

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point

Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use.

Value Range
0–6

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Budget Management

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

718 PC Programming Manual

 2.12 [6] Feature

Charge Options—Currency
Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 3 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Budget Management

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information
1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.26.3 Call Charge Services
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

Charge Options—Currency Display Position

Specifies whether the currency characters are displayed before or after the call charge.

Value Range
Head, Tail

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Budget Management

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit

Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during
a conversation.

Value Range
Alarm: Only a warning tone is heard.
Alarm + Disconnect: A warning tone is heard, and then the call is disconnected.

PC Programming Manual 719

2.12 [6] Feature

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit

Feature Guide References

1.9.2 Budget Management

Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection

Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone
company is detected.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Programming Manual References

2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit

Feature Guide References

1.26.3 Call Charge Services

720 PC Programming Manual

 2.13 [7] TRS

2.13 [7] TRS

2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls.
Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7
provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all
trunk calls are allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination
of Denied Code Tables here and Exception Code Tables in 2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code. If the
leading digits of the dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code Tables, the call is
made.
A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a time.
To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6

Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

PC Programming Manual 721

2.13 [7] TRS

2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls.
Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7
provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all
trunk calls are allowed). TRS/Barring levels 2–6 are used to restrict calls according to the combination
of Denied Code Tables in 2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code and Exception Code Tables here. A call
denied by the applicable Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code
Tables, and if a match is found, the call is made.
A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level. 20 codes are displayed at a
time. To display other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6

Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction/call barring for each
level.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

722 PC Programming Manual

 2.13 [7] TRS

2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code

If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access Code is required
each time a trunk call is made. By programming these Special Carrier Access Codes here, Toll
Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) can restrict or allow calls to be made by ignoring the codes
and looking at the telephone number only. If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled
number, TRS/Barring will look only at the following digits.
A maximum of 20 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 100 (with the KX-TDA600)
Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDA600, 20 codes are displayed at
a time. To show other sets of codes, click the applicable tab.

Special Carrier Access Code

Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code. Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes
should be unique.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

PC Programming Manual 723

2.13 [7] TRS

2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial

Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk.
The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring),
Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded.
A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

Emergency Number
Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls. It is not necessary to start the emergency
number with a Trunk Access number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], P [Pause], and F [Flash])

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.2 Emergency Call

724 PC Programming Manual

 2.13 [7] TRS

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls.
Five optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check or to override TRS/
Barring.

TRS Override by System Speed Dialling

Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed
Dialling.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

TRS Check for dial "* #"

Enables a TRS/Barring check for the user-dialled " " and "#". This is useful in preventing
unauthorised calls which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges.

Value Range
No Check, Check

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check

Selects whether a trunk is disconnected if the TRS/Barring check has not been completed when the
trunk Inter-digit timer expires.

Value Range
Disconnect: The trunk is disconnected as soon as the timer expires.
Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires.

PC Programming Manual 725

2.13 [7] TRS

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user
receives a trunk call. If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit, the line will be
disconnected.

Value Range
None, 1–7

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

TRS Check after EFA

Enables TRS/Barring to check the digits dialled after External Feature Access (EFA) during a trunk
call.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

726 PC Programming Manual

 2.14 [8] ARS

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call
is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and
modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.

ARS Mode
Selects the condition to determine when to operate ARS.

Value Range
Off: ARS is disabled.
On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line
Access method.
On for Any CO Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using Idle Line
Access, Trunk Access, or S-CO Line Access method.

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.5.3 Trunk Access
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial

Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 2.14.2 [8-2]
Leading Number.

Value Range
Disconnect: the line will be disconnected.
Local Access: the dialled number will be handled by Idle Line Access method.

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 727

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the
ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading
number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number. The
additional (remaining) number of digits must be specified only when "#", for example, is needed after
the dialled number. The "#" will be added after the programmed number of digits of the user-dialled
number (excluding the leading number).
100 leading numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of leading numbers, click the
applicable tab.

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Additional Number of Digits

Specifies the additional (remaining) number of digits following each leading number.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Routing Plan Number

Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number.

728 PC Programming Manual

 2.14 [8] ARS

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–16

For KX-TDA600:
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 729

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.3 [8-3] Routing Plan Time

The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week.
There are 16 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) Routing
Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing
Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
• To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan, click and drag the divisions between two time
periods.
• To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan, including adding or
deleting time blocks, click Time Setting.

730 PC Programming Manual

 2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting

The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week,
for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins.

Time-A–D—Setting
Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Time-A–D—Hour, Minute
Specifies the start time for each time block.

Value Range
00:00–23:59

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 731

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority

The carrier priority (1 through 6) in a Routing Plan Table can be programmed for each time zone of
each day of the week. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.
Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab.

Time-A–Time-D
Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 1–10

For KX-TDA600:
None, 1–48

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

732 PC Programming Manual

 2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Carrier
It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate
carrier. A maximum of 10 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600)
different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.

Carrier Name
Specifies the carrier name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user-dialled number.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Modify Command
Specifies the commands to modify the user-dialled number to access the carrier. For details of each
command, see the Feature Guide.

Value Range
Max. 16 characters (consisting of 0–9, *, #, C, P, A, G, I and H)

PC Programming Manual 733

2.14 [8] ARS

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Carrier Access Code

Specifies the carrier access code. The carrier access code can be added to the user-dialled number
by specifying "C" in Modify Command on this screen.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96

(KX-TDA600)
Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier.

TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96

(KX-TDA600)
Enables each trunk group for each carrier. If a cell is highlighted in blue, that trunk group is enabled
for use with that carrier.

Value Range
OFF (white), ON (blue)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

734 PC Programming Manual

 2.14 [8] ARS

Authorisation Code for Tenant

Specifies an Authorisation code for each tenant. The Authorisation codes can be added to the user-
dialled number by specifying "A" command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab.

Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 8

Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.2.3 Tenant Service

PC Programming Manual 735

2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception

Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled
number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line
Access method if ARS Mode in 2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings is "on".
A maximum of 200 different leading number exceptions can be programmed. 40 leading number
exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other sets, click the applicable tab.

Leading Number Exception

Specifies the leading number exception.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and X)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

736 PC Programming Manual

 2.14 [8] ARS

2.14.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG

An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here
can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the
Carrier tab of screen 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier.
8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab.

Authorisation Code for Trunk Group—TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-

TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDA600)
Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.

Value Range
Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.14.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG

Programming Manual References

2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—Modify Command

Feature Guide References

1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

PC Programming Manual 737

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost
effective communications between company members at different locations.
A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to
make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the
trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
There are two types of routing methods: the Extension Number Method, where all extensions in the
network are given a unique extension number; and the PBX Code Method, where each PBX is given
a unique code, which is dialled before the extension number to call an extension at another PBX.
Two priority sets (from a total of 8) are displayed at a time. To display other priority sets, click the
applicable tab.
Using a private network, up to 8 PBXs can share one VPS (centralised VM) connected to another
PBX. This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.
Only extension numbers of 4 digits or less, using the Extension Number Method, are supported.

Own PBX Code

Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX, when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line
network. If this cell is left empty, the Extension Number Method is used.

Value Range
Max. 7 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Priority 1–Priority 8

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of others in the TIE
line network.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

738 PC Programming Manual

 2.15 [9] Private Network

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Removed Number of Digits

Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Added Number
Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause])

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Trunk Group
Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
None, 1–64

For KX-TDA600:
None, 1–96

PC Programming Manual 739

2.15 [9] Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Centralised VM

Leading Number
Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the
TIE line network.

Value Range
Max. 3 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required)

Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached
to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

740 PC Programming Manual

 2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting
notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed.
Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on
a Network DSS (NDSS) button. Network Message Waiting notifications are used for the Centralised
VM feature, and a VPS can send notifications to extensions connected to any PBX in the network.

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network

PBX ID
Specifies the Network ID of the PBX, for Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS). This parameter
must be set in correspondence with the Network IDs assigned to other PBXs in the network.
Network IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX each within a network. Assigning the same
Network ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.
Changing this value in Interactive mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data.

Value Range
0: The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs.
1: The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs.
2–8: The PBX transmits BLF data over the network.

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission VoIP->ISDN
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from a VoIP port through any ISDN ports that are set
to transmit BLF data.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—ISDN CO—Networking Data Transfer
2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—Networking
Data Transfer

PC Programming Manual 741

2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission ISDN->VoIP
Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set
to transmit BLF data.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)—IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Transmission Counter
Specifies the maximum number of "hops", or transmissions between two PBXs, before a packet of
BLF data is discarded.

Value Range
1–63

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data

Broadcasting Interval Timer
Specifies the frequency of BLF data transmission. The PBX will send data over the network
periodically according to the interval specified here.

Value Range
100 × n (n=0–30) ms

742 PC Programming Manual

 2.15 [9] Private Network

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-

transmission : Repeat Counter
Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated
before being cancelled.

Value Range
0–10

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required)

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-

transmission : Repeat Timer
Specifies the length of time between repeated re-transmission of network message waiting
notifications.

Value Range
10–240 s

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required)

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

PC Programming Manual 743

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

This screen allows network operators to be programmed. A network operator is an extension at a
remote PBX that will monitor other PBX extensions using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS).
The settings on this screen should be programmed at the PBX that is to be monitored (Network BLF
Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID 2–8). Up to 8 network
operators can be programmed.

Network Operator Extension No.

Specifies the number of an extension at the monitor PBX (the PBX whose Network BLF Data
Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in 2.15.2 [9-2]
Network Data Transmission). Any extension at the monitor PBX can be specified here.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

Programming Manual References

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator
Feature—Network PBX ID

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

IP-GW Card Slot No. to notify BLF data to Network Operator

Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDA600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send
extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30:
Undefined, 5–7

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Undefined, 1–11

For KX-TDA600:
Undefined, 1-1–4-11

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

Programming Manual References

2.7.1 [1-1] Slot

744 PC Programming Manual

 2.15 [9] Private Network

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 745

2.15 [9] Private Network

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection
(NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS
button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
To clear NDSS link data, click the NDSS Clear button.
Note that the parameters on this screen can only be set when the Network BLF Data Transmission
for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID is set to 1 in the 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data
Transmission screen.

Network Extension No.

Specifies the number of the remote extension (attached to another PBX) that will be monitored. The
number input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and "," [comma])

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30 Networking Features—1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network Extension Name for Programming Reference

Specifies the name of the network extension. This name is only shown here, not on the displays of
extensions.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored

Indicates the Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of
the PBX that the extension is connected to (reference only).

746 PC Programming Manual

 2.15 [9] Private Network

Value Range
None, 1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

Programming Manual References

2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—Network BLF Data Transmission for Centralised Operator
Feature—Network PBX ID

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 747

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups.
For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf
and slot and card type to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.

Physical—Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Physical—Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Physical—Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

748 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Card Type
Indicates the type of card to which the CO line is connected (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CO Name
Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension's display when receiving a call from the
trunk.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.20.4 Display Information

Trunk Group Number

Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs.

PC Programming Manual 749

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Value Range
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
1–64

KX-TDA600:
1–96

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.2 Group

750 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each
trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to
which DIL distribution is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode
(day/lunch/break/night). If desired, Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution can be used in
conjunction with DIL distribution.
For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list with their shelf and
slot numbers. Select the card to programme, or select "All" to display all matching cards.

DIL
For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different DIL destinations can be programmed
depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Generally, DIL distribution is used for trunk calls
from analogue trunks. Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be programmed for each
trunk.
To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

PC Programming Manual 751

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

752 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on
the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9): For an extension number at the local PBX
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9): For an extension number at a remote PBX

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending
on the time of day.

PC Programming Manual 753

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
2.2.3 Tenant Service
2.2.4 Time Service

VM Trunk Group
Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the DIL destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group.
The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to
the caller.

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

CLI for DIL

When CLI distribution is enabled for a trunk to which DIL distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will
be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DIL destinations) if the caller's identification
number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk
basis.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

754 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

PC Programming Manual 755

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on
the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

756 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

DDI / DID / TIE / MSN

For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this
screen is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can
be programmed.

Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf position (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot
Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

PC Programming Manual 757

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Port
Indicates the port number (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Card Type
Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).

Value Range
Card type

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY

Trunk Property
Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only).

Value Range
Public, Private(TIE), VPN

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

758 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.30.1 TIE Line Service
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Distribution Method
Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on
the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.

Value Range
DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive
DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls
MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
Specifies the number of leading digits to be removed from the incoming called number for DDI/DID
distribution or for TIE line service.

Value Range
0–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

PC Programming Manual 759

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits
for DDI/DID distribution or for TIE line service.

Value Range
Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

760 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID
number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID
number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller's
identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID
Table. CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a
DDI/DID number basis.
A maximum of 1000 DDI/DID numbers can be programmed with other related parameters. 100
numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
To assign DDI/DID destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6
Extension Number Setting). It is possible to programme DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID
destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for a set of locations in series at once by
clicking Automatic Registration, or to programme DDI/DID names for a set of locations in series at
once by clicking Name Generate.

DDI / DID Number

Specifies the DDI/DID number.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID Name

Specifies the name for the DDI/DID number which is shown on the extension's display when receiving
a call with the DDI/DID number. The name of the DDI/DID number can be printed out on SMDR.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate
2.17.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options—SMDR Options—DDI/DID Number & Name

PC Programming Manual 761

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the DDI/DID destination in each time mode.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9): For an extension number at the local PBX
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9): For an extension number at a remote PBX

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending
on the time of day.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the DID destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group.
The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to
the caller.

762 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Value Range
1–48

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Programming Manual References

2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

PC Programming Manual 763

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/
lunch/break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Generate DDI/DID Number (From)

Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed. DDI/DID numbers for subsequent
locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the value of the previous location.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number of Registration
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

764 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be
programmed. If the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the
appropriate Same all check box. If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked, the
destination numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically, by adding one to the
value of the previous location for that time mode.

Value Range
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 765

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series.
If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded.

Beginning Entry Location

Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Number to Generate
Specifies the number of locations to be programmed.

Value Range
1–1000

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

No. of Digits to Delete

Specifies the number of digits to be deleted from the start of a DDI/DID number when using it as part
of the DDI/DID name.

Value Range
0–32

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

766 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Name Prefix
Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Name Suffix
Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI/DID name.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate

Programming Manual References

2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

PC Programming Manual 767

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can
be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night).
A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
To use this feature, Access Mode in 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port must be set to P-MP.
For KX-TDA600, all installed BRI cards set to MSN distribution are displayed in the Select Shelf &
Slot list with their shelf and slot numbers. Select the card to programme, or select "All" to display all
matching cards.

Main
To assign MSN destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension
Number Setting).

Shelf No. (KX-TDA600 only)

Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Shelf number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Slot No.
Indicates the slot position of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Slot number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

768 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Port No.
Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

MSN Number
Specifies the MSN.

Value Range
Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

MSN Name
Specifies the name for the MSN which is shown on the extension's display when receiving a call with
the MSN.

Value Range
Max. 20 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

PC Programming Manual 769

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

MSN Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Specifies the MSN destination in each time mode.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9): For an extension number at the local PBX
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9): For an extension number at a remote PBX

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Tenant Number
Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending
on the time of day.

Value Range
1–8

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port
2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

VM Trunk Group No.

Specifies the number of the VPS trunk group sent to the VPS when the MSN destination is the floating
extension number of a VM (DPT) Group.
The VPS trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to
the caller.

Value Range
1–48

770 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

CLI for MSN

When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk
calls will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller's
identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk
basis.

Port
Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only).

Value Range
Port number

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table

Programming Manual References

2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

PC Programming Manual 771

2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous

The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or
when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination.

Intercept—Intercept Routing - Busy (Destination is busy) (not available for

MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Enables the Intercept Routing—Busy feature to activate when the original destination is busy.

Value Range
Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a busy tone to the caller. (However, for a call through an LCOT/ELCOT
or T1 [LCOT/GCOT] card, the caller hears a ringback tone while the call waits for the original
destination to become idle.)
Enable: Redirects the call to the intercept destination

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND)

Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND
mode.

Value Range
Disable (Busy Tone): Sends a busy tone to the caller. (However, a call through an LCOT/ELCOT or
T1 [LCOT/GCOT] card will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone.)
Enable: Redirects the call to the intercept destination

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

772 PC Programming Manual

 2.16 [10] CO & Incoming Call

Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not

programmed)
Enables the Intercept Routing—No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the
call. (The Intercept Routing—No Destination feature always works for calls through an LCOT/ELCOT
or T1 [LCOT/GCOT] card, even when this feature is disabled.)

Value Range
Disable (Reorder Tone): Sends a reorder tone to the caller
Enable: Redirects the call to an operator

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call (MPR Software File Version

3.1000 or later)
Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

PC Programming Manual 773

2.17 [11] Maintenance

2.17 [11] Maintenance

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

SMDR
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about
incoming and outgoing calls.

SMDR Format—Type
Selects the format of SMDR output.

Value Range
Type A: 80 digits without call charge information
Type B: 80 digits with call charge information
Type C: 120 digits

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Port
Selects the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port that is used to output the SMDR data.

Value Range
None, RS-232C

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)

Specifies the number of lines on a page of output paper. Match the SMDR output to the paper size
being used in the printer.

774 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Value Range
4–99

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)

Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip
perforation should be shorter than the page length.

Value Range
0–95

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Date Format

Selects the printed date format.

Value Range
MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD, YY-DD-MM

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H)

Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format.

PC Programming Manual 775

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Value Range
12H, 24H

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Outgoing Call

Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS)
programming determines the printable records.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Incoming Call

Specifies whether the information relating to incoming trunk calls, such as caller's identification name
and number, is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

776 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Print Information—Intercom Call

Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out
1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Print Information—Hotel Room Status

Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

PC Programming Manual 777

2.17 [11] Maintenance

1.27.2 Room Status Control

Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Print Information—Error Log

Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to SMDR.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

SMDR Options

SMDR Options—ARS Dial

Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature.

Value Range
Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number
Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number

778 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
1.10 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Options—Caller ID Number & Name

Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming trunk calls.

Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Options—DDI/DID Number & Name

Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number.

Value Range
None, Number, Name, Name + Number

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Options—Secret Dial

Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial. The secret dial conceals all or part of the dialled
number.

PC Programming Manual 779

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in SMDR Options—ARS Dial on this screen
indicates the dialled numbers as dots regardless of this setting.

Value Range
Print "...." (Secret), Print Dialled Number

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.1 Memory Dialling Features—SUMMARY
1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Options—Privacy Mode

Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled, and how many digits to hide when enabled.
To enable this setting, Print Information—Outgoing Call on the SMDR tab should be set to Print.

Value Range
Print Dialled Number: Disables private dialling; all dialled numbers are shown on SMDR.
No Print: No dialled number will be shown on SMDR.
Secret "X", Secret "XX", Secret "XXX", Secret "XXXX": The selected number of digits at the end of
dialled telephone numbers, and any additional digits dialled after connection, are shown on SMDR
as "X".

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Outgoing Call

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Options—Condition Code "RC"

Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

780 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Options—Condition Code "AN"

Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed.

Value Range
No Print, Print

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

SMDR Options—Caller ID Modification

Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by
the PBX) or after being modified.

Value Range
Before Modification, After Modification

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

RS-232C

Communication—Baud Rate
Specifies the data transmission speed from the PBX to the printer or personal computer.
To ensure stable transmission, when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps, set
Communication—Flow on this screen to Hardware.

PC Programming Manual 781

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Value Range
2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.17.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C—Communication—Flow

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Communication—NL Code
Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer.
If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR
(Carriage Return). If not, select CR+LF (Line Feed).

Value Range
CR+LF, CR

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Communication—Parity Bit
Selects a parity bit code that indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of
bits composing a character.
Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.

Value Range
None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

782 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Communication—Word Length
Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character.
When connecting the KX-TDA Maintenance Console to the PBX using an RS-232C cable, assign the
following values to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX:
Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: None, Stop Bit: 1 bit

CAUTION
Do not use the following combinations:
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 1 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Mark, Stop Bit: 2 bit
• Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 2 bit

Value Range
7 bit, 8 bit

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Communication—Flow
Enables the hardware flow control.

Value Range
None, Hardware

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

None

Communication—Stop Bit
Selects a stop bit code that indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character.
Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer.

Value Range
1 bit, 2 bit

PC Programming Manual 783

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

External Modem Command—Automatic Initialisation

Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial
Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX.

Value Range
Max. 30 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

External Modem Command—Manual Initialisation 1–Manual Initialisation 5

Specifies the command to manually initialise an external modem. The command specified here is
controlled by PT system programming (External Modem Control [801]).

Value Range
Max. 30 characters

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

784 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance

Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2

Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the
PBX detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is
pressed, the display will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Set

Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Hour

Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time.

Value Range
0–23

PC Programming Manual 785

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time.

Value Range
0–59

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted
after re-transmission is repeated for the number of times specified in Network MSW Data
Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter in 2.15.2 [9-
2] Network Data Transmission.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required)
2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM
Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

786 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if the quantity of network message waiting
information being re-transmitted is larger than the transmission buffer.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required)

Feature Guide References

1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Remote

Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an
RMT card must be installed, and Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

Specifies the floating extension number for ISDN remote maintenance. To enable this setting,
Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.

Value Range
For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:
Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 787

2.17 [11] Maintenance

For KX-TDA600:
Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

Remote—Remote Programming
Enables system programming, diagnosis, and data upload from a remote location.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming

Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is
locked.

Value Range
None, 1–15

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

788 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Remote—Remote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for

reference)
Specifies the telephone number of the PBX used to access the PBX from a remote location for
maintenance purposes.
This number can be specified by Quick Setup.

Value Range
Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.4 Quick Setup

Password
Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal
computer.

System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level

Specifies the user level system password to authorise the PT user to access only the permitted
system programming.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level

Specifies the administrator level system password to authorise the PT user to access all system
programming.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

PC Programming Manual 789

2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

Specifies the manager password to authorise the PT user to access manager programming.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.2.6 Manager Features

System Password - PC Programming—User Level

Specifies the system password used to access KX-TDA Maintenance Console at User Level.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level

Specifies the system password used to access KX-TDA Maintenance Console at Administrator Level.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

790 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level

Specifies the system password used to access KX-TDA Maintenance Console at Installer Level.

Value Range
4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9)

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.1 [11-1] Main

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.1 PC Programming

PC Programming Manual 791

2.17 [11] Maintenance

2.17.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access

The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified.
100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the
applicable tab.

Program Number
Indicates the programming item number (reference only).

Value Range
000–999

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

PROG**
Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item.

Value Range
Disable, Enable

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.3.2 PT Programming

792 PC Programming Manual

 2.17 [11] Maintenance

2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-

TDA600 only)
When the power supply to the PBX fails, power failure transfer (PFT) switches the current connections
to Auxiliary Connections, so that certain SLTs and trunks can be connected. Auxiliary Connections
allow trunk calls to be made during a power failure. Up to 6 pairs of trunk cards and extension cards
that are physically connected by RJ11 cable can be specified. The conversations through the lines
specified here will be maintained even when the power returns.
For the KX-TDA600, select the shelf for which to set connections from the Shelf list. Note that PFT
connections can only be made within the same shelf.

Trunk Card Slot No.

Specifies the position of the trunk card to be used.

Value Range
None, 1–11

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer

Extension Card Slot No.

Specifies the position of the extension card to be used.

Value Range
None, 1–11

Maintenance Console Location

2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

Programming Manual References

None

Feature Guide References

2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer

PC Programming Manual 793

2.17 [11] Maintenance

794 PC Programming Manual

Section 3
Appendix

PC Programming Manual 795

3.1 Revision History

3.1 Revision History

3.1.1 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3.1xxx

New Contents
• 2.4.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS

• 2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/

KX-TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000
or later)

• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options

– Option 4—System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
– Option 5—Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
– Option 5—ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000
or later)

• 2.8.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

• 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—Call Log to ICD

Group for Answered Call (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

– Intercept Destination—Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy (MPR
Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Intercept No Answer Time
– Option 9—PDN Delayed Ringing (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

– Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

– Intercept Destination—Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy (MPR
Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Intercept No Answer Time
– Option 9—PDN Delayed Ringing (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

– Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

796 PC Programming Manual

 3.1 Revision History

– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button

– Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1

– DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy (MPR Software File Version
3.1000 or later)
– DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous—Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call (MPR Software

File Version 3.1000 or later)

Changed Contents
• 2.4.8 Tool—Import

• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)

• 2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer
(IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

• 2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not available for

MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Intercept (not available for MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)

• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type

Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN (MPR Software File Version
3.1000 or later))

• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number)
(for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or
later))

• 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—DISA Intercept—Intercept when

Destination through DISA is Busy (not available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

PC Programming Manual 797

3.1 Revision History

• 2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous—Intercept—Intercept Routing - Busy (Destination is busy) (not

available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

798 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

3.2 Feature Programming References

A

Absent Message
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Absent Message Set / Cancel
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent Message
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Absent Message
• 2.12.5 [6-5] Absent Message
Feature Guide Reference
1.19.2 Absent Message

Account Code Entry

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Account Code Entry
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Account Code Mode
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry

Advice of Charge (AOC)

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Automatic Callback Busy
Feature Guide Reference
1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Automatic Extension Release

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Dial—Extension First Digit
– Dial—Extension Inter-digit
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
– Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

• 2.4.8 Tool—Import
– ARS - Leading Digit

PC Programming Manual 799

3.2 Feature Programming References

– ARS - Except Code

– ARS - Routing Plan
• 2.4.9 Tool—Export
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Extension Inter-digit
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3—Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemised Code
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—ARS Itemised Code
• 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Itemised Billing Code for ARS
• 2.14 [8] ARS
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Options—ARS Dial
Feature Guide Reference
1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

Automatic Setup
• 2.4 Tool—2.4.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 2.8.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—Automatic Time Adjustment—by ISDN & Caller ID
(FSK)
Feature Guide Reference
2.3.5 Automatic Setup

Background Music (BGM)

• 2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only)
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– External BGM On / Off
– BGM Set / Cancel
• 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.4 Background Music (BGM)

Broadcasting
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Broadcasting—Ring Duration
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Broadcasting Operation
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Broadcasting Operation
• 2.9.24 [3-10] Broadcasting Group
• 2.9.25 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List

800 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

Feature Guide Reference

1.16.1 Broadcasting

Budget Management
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit
• 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Budget Management
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Charge—Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
Feature Guide Reference
1.9.2 Budget Management

Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

• 2.4.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recordings (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.4.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– SVM—Recording Time (KX-TDA30 only)
– SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Simplified Voice Message Access (KX-
TDA30 only)
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence (KX-TDA30 only)
– Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous (KX-TDA30 only)
– Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Display Lock / SVM Lock
(KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.10.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—SVM Lock (KX-TDA30
only)
• 2.10.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.11.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM (KX-TDA30 only)
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

Call Billing for Guest Room

• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone"
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%)
Feature Guide Reference
1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room

PC Programming Manual 801

3.2 Feature Programming References

Call Charge Services

• 2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property
– Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.9.3 [3-1-3] Trunk Group—Charge Rate
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Telephone" (%)
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
– Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit
– Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection
Feature Guide Reference
1.26.3 Call Charge Services

Call Forwarding (FWD)

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—FWD No Answer Timer Set
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
– TRS—Call Forward to CO
– Extension Feature—Group Forward Set
– Extension Feature—Remote Operation by Other Extension
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time
– Extension-CO Duration Time
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
• 2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
• 2.10.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND
Feature Guide Reference
1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY

802 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary

Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—CF (MSN)
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG

Call Hold
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Recall—Hold Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
– Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
– Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
– Option 1—PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
– Option 4—SLT—SLT Hold Mode
Feature Guide Reference
1.13.1 Call Hold

Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—ISDN Hold
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN

Call Monitor
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Call Monitor
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Call Monitor
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Data Mode
– Option 3—Executive Override Deny

PC Programming Manual 803

3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny

Feature Guide Reference
1.8.3 Call Monitor

Call Park
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters
– Recall—Call Park Recall
– Recall—Disconnect after Recall
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Guide Reference
1.13.2 Call Park

Call Pickup
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Call Pickup
– Directed Call Pickup
– Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Call Pickup by DSS
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4
– DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call
– DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
– DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
• 2.9.5 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny
Feature Guide Reference
1.4.1.3 Call Pickup

Call Transfer
• 2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM—BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—Transfer Recall
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—Transfer to CO
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4

804 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

– DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call

– Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS Operation
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Transfer Recall Destination
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Transfer Recall
Destination
Feature Guide Reference
1.12.1 Call Transfer

Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.33 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Card Property—QSIG-CT
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.4.4 Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Call Waiting
• 2.7.10 [1-1] Slot—LCO Card Property—Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Call Waiting Mode: Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
– Call Waiting Mode: Automatic Call Waiting
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 5—Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension
Call (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
Feature Guide Reference

PC Programming Manual 805

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.1.3.3 Call Waiting

Call Waiting Tone

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2—Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
– Option 2—Automatic C. Waiting
– Option 4—Call Waiting Tone Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone

Caller ID
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
– Caller ID—Waiting to receive
– Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Private Network—Public Call through Private
Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits
• 2.8.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Caller-ID Modification Table
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7
– Extension Caller ID Sending
– Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
• 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
• 2.12.2 [6-2] Caller ID Modification
Feature Guide Reference
1.18.1 Caller ID

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

• 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
– CLI Destination
• 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table—CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table—CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution

806 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– CPC Signal Detection (DDI/DID)—Outgoing, Incoming (for DDI/DID channel)
– CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming (for GCOT or LCOT channel)
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—CPC Detection Time—Out, In
• 2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—CPC Detection Time—Out (DID), In (DID)
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port
– ISDN CO—Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF
(Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– CO Setting—Subscriber Number
– Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF
(Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Subscriber
Number
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Subscriber Number
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
– Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer
(CLIP of Held Party)
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—CLIP on ICD
Group Button
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– Option 1—CLIP ID
– Option 3—CLIP on Extension/CO
– Option 3—CLIR
– Option 3—COLR
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 1—CLIP ID
– Option 3—CLIP on Extension/CO
– Option 3—CLIR
– Option 3—COLR
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference

PC Programming Manual 807

3.2 Feature Programming References

1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected

Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG
• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– COLR Set / Cancel
– CLIR Set / Cancel
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG

Centralised Voice Mail

• 2.7.46 [1-3] Option—New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-
TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Centralised VM
• 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission :
Repeat Counter
– Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission :
Repeat Timer
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—Maintenance
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
– Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail

Class of Service (COS)

• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
Feature Guide Reference
2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service

808 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D,
AOC-E, 3PTY
– CCBS Option
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service
– COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D,
AOC-E, 3PTY
– CCBS Type
– CCBS delete digits
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.4.5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—by QSIG

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

• 2.7.42 [1-1] Slot—CTI-LINK Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Dial Information (CTI)
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
Feature Guide Reference
1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)

Conference
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
– Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—Transfer to CO
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Echo Cancel—Conference
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.14.1.2 Conference

Confirmation Tone
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3

PC Programming Manual 809

3.2 Feature Programming References

– Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Doorphone / Called by Voice

– Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after making call
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after answering call
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
– Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
Feature Guide Reference
1.29.2 Confirmation Tone

Dial Tone
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
– Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
– Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
Feature Guide Reference
1.29.1 Dial Tone

Dial Tone Transfer

• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Feature Guide Reference
1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer

Dial Type Selection

• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– Pulse Speed
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– CO Dial Mode
– DTMF Width
– CO Pulse Speed
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port
– CO Dial Mode
– DTMF Width

810 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

– CO Pulse Speed
• 2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– CO Pulse Speed
• 2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port
– Dialling Mode
– DTMF Width
– CO Pulse Speed
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection

Direct In Line (DIL)

• 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

• 2.7.30 [1-1] Slot—DID Card Property
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Receiving Dial Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID
• 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
– DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after Answering
– DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
– DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
– DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
– DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
– DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
– DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter

PC Programming Manual 811

3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Accept the Call from

DISA
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
– DISA Tone Detection—Silence
– DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
– DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Intercept (not available for MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)—Intercept Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—
When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Intercept Destination—
When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
• 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Display Information
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 5—PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— Option 5
– Display Language
– Incoming Call Display
– Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Charge
– Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point
– Charge Options—Currency
– Charge Options—Currency Display Position
• 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings—CO Name
Feature Guide Reference
1.20.4 Display Information

Do Not Disturb (DND)

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND
Tone
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—DND Override
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Intercept (not available for MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)—Intercept Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)

812 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.10.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

– Call from CO—DND Status Availability
– Call from Extension—DND Status Availability
Feature Guide Reference
1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)

Door Open
• 2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Device Type
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—Doorphone—Open
Duration
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Door Open
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Door Unlock
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.2 Door Open

Doorphone Call
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
– Doorphone—Call Duration
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Doorphone Call
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night
• 2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Doorphone / Called
by Voice
• 2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.1 Doorphone Call

E1 Line Service
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port
• 2.7.26 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Channel Command
Feature Guide Reference
1.22.1 E1 Line Service

Emergency Call
• 2.13.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.2 Emergency Call

Executive Busy Override

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Executive Busy Override
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

PC Programming Manual 813

3.2 Feature Programming References

– CO & SMDR—Executive Busy Override

– Extension Feature—Executive Busy Override Deny
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny
Feature Guide Reference
1.8.2 Executive Busy Override

Extension Dial Lock

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
– Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
– Remote Extension Dial Lock On
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level on Extension Lock
Feature Guide Reference
1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock

Extension Feature Clear

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension Feature Clear
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2
– Extension Clear—Call Waiting
– Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
– Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Feature Guide Reference
1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Extension PIN Set / Cancel
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
Feature Guide Reference
1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Extension Port Configuration

• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Pair Extension
Feature Guide Reference
2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration

External Feature Access (EFA)

• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Flash Time
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Flash Time
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Flash Time
• 2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Flash Time

814 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Flash Time

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Feature Access
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO
Conversation
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO
Conversation
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—TRS Check after EFA
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

External Relay Control

• 2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Device Type
• 2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)—For Output (EIO)—Device Type
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—External Relay Access
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—External Relay
Access
• 2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.10 External Relay Control

External Sensor
• 2.7.39 [1-1] Slot—OPB (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Input Signal Decision Time
– Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
• 2.7.43 [1-1] Slot—DPH Card Property (KX-TDA30 only)
– For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Decision Time
– For Sensor (EIO)—Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—External Sensor—Ring Duration
• 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern
Plan 1–8
• 2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.9 External Sensor

Flash/Recall/Terminate
• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Disconnect Time
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Disconnect Time
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Disconnect Time
• 2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Disconnect Time
• 2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Disconnect Time

PC Programming Manual 815

3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO

Conversation
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Flash Mode during CO
Conversation
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Flexible Buttons
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in
Idle Mode
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
• 2.10.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible Button Data Copy
• 2.10.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
Feature Guide Reference
1.20.2 Flexible Buttons

Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
– Extension
– Features
– Other PBX Extension
• 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
Feature Guide Reference
2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Floating Extension
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
– Floating Extension Number
– Group Name
• 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Floating Extension No.
• 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Floating Ext. No.
• 2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Floating Extension Number
• 2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager—Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number
• 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—Floating Extension Number
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—Remote
– Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
– Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number
Feature Guide Reference

816 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

2.3.7 Floating Extension

FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
– Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
– PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND Reference
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Both))
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External))
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (Internal))
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—FWD / DND Reference
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Feature Guide Reference
1.3.1.4 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Group
• 2.9 [3] Group
Feature Guide Reference
2.2.2 Group

Group Call Distribution

• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main—Distribution Method

PC Programming Manual 817

3.2 Feature Programming References

– Main—Call Waiting Distribution

– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extensions
• 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
– Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
– Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required)
• 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member—Delayed Ring
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-up Timer
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-up Timer
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution

Hands-free Answerback
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—Reorder Tone for
PT Hands-free
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
– Option 1—PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
– Option 4—Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5
– Automatic Answer for CO Call
– Forced Automatic Answer
Feature Guide Reference
1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback

Hands-free Operation
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Tone Length—Reorder Tone for
PT Hands-free
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Answer Mode
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.1 Hands-free Operation

Headset Operation
• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Headset OFF/ON (for DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, or S-
Hybrid(S-DPT) port)
• 2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—IP-PT
Registration and De-registration—Headset OFF/ON
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.4 Headset Operation

Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code

818 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR—SMDR Options—ARS Dial

Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

Hot Line
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Start
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set /
Cancel
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
– Pickup Dial Set
– Pickup Dial No.
Feature Guide Reference
1.6.1.7 Hot Line

Idle Extension Hunting

• 2.9.14 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
• 2.9.15 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting

Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Main
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Miscellaneous
• 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous
• 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features

Incoming Call Log

• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group
FWD—Supervisor Extension Number
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 5—Incoming Call Display
– Option 6—Incoming Call Log Lock (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Option 6—Incoming Call Log Memory
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

PC Programming Manual 819

3.2 Feature Programming References

– Option 5—Incoming Call Display

– Option 6—Incoming Call Log Memory
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.18.2 Incoming Call Log

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

• 2.4.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration
• 2.7.13 [1-1] Slot—BRI/PRI Card Property
• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port
• 2.7.15 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Port Command
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.7.17 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port—Port Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Extension Inter-digit
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc
mode
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– Option 6—ISDN Bearer
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—ISDN Bearer
• 2.12.8 [6-7] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

Intercept Routing
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer
(IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—Intercept
Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Intercept (not available for MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)—Intercept Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night (not available for
MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer—
Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Intercept Destination
– Intercept No Answer Time
• 2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing

Intercept Routing—No Destination

• 2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

820 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.16.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous—Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination

is not programmed)
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Intercom Call
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Main—Extension Number
– Main—Extension Name
– Option 4—Intercom Call by Voice
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
– Extension Number
– Extension Name
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.3 Intercom Call

Internal Call Block

• 2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block—COS Number of the Extension Which
Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–64
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—COS
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—COS
• 2.11.6 [5-4] External Relay—COS Number
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block

Internal Call Features

• 2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.2 Internal Call Features

IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

• 2.7.36 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not
available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
Feature Guide Reference
1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)

ISDN Extension
• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—ISDN Extension
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Extension Setting
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension

PC Programming Manual 821

3.2 Feature Programming References

ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for ISDN Service)
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol

KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—KX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Feature Guide Reference
1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling

Last Number Redial

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
– Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval
– Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
– Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Redial
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2
– Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
– Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
– Redial—Call Log by Redial key
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Outgoing Call Log Memory
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Outgoing Call Log
Memory
Feature Guide Reference
1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial

LED Indication
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
– Option 4—DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call

822 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

Feature Guide Reference

1.20.3 LED Indication

Line Preference—Incoming
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—Incoming Preferred Line
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—Incoming Preferred Line
Feature Guide Reference
1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Line Preference—Outgoing
• 2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
• 2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—Outgoing Preferred Line
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—Outgoing Preferred Line
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing

Local Alarm Information

• 2.5.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main
– SMDR—Print Information—Error Log
– Maintenance—Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Set
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Hour
– Maintenance—Daily Test Start Time—Minute
Feature Guide Reference
2.4.3 Local Alarm Information

Log-in/Log-out
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Log-in / Log-out
– Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
– No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
– Last Extension Log-out
• 2.9.12 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous—Options—Wrap-up Timer
based on
• 2.9.13 [3-5-4] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member—Wrap-up Timer
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7—Wrap-up Timer
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

PC Programming Manual 823

3.2 Feature Programming References

– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)

• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6—Wrap-up Timer
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Log-in / Log-out
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out

Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—MCID
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID)

Manager Features
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Manager
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—Password—Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
Feature Guide Reference
2.2.6 Manager Features

Message Waiting
• 2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property—SLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/
KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—Message Waiting Set
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
– Option 3—Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
– Option 4—SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only)
• 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—VM DTMF Command—Listening
Message
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—SLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.19.1 Message Waiting

824 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

• 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
– Distribution Method
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Remove Digit
– DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial
• 2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service

Music on Hold
• 2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-
TDA600 only)
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only)
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
• 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA30 only)
Feature Guide Reference
1.13.4 Music on Hold

Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) (KX-TDA0920/KX-TDA3920/KX-TDA6920 required)

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—ISDN CO—Networking Data Transfer
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—
Networking Data Transfer
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Manager
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 2.10.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 2.10.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for NDSS)
• 2.15.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
• 2.15.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
• 2.15.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS)

PC Programming Manual 825

3.2 Feature Programming References

Network ICD Group

• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD
Group with Cellular Phone
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.6 Network ICD Group

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Feature Guide Reference
1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA)

Off-hook Monitor
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/
T75xx/T76xx
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor

One-touch Dialling
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5—Flexible Button
Programming Mode
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5—Flexible Button
Programming Mode
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Dial (for One-touch)
Feature Guide Reference
1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling

Operator Features
• 2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM—PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
• 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—Operator (Extension Number)
Feature Guide Reference
2.2.5 Operator Features

826 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

Outgoing Message (OGM)

• 2.5.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
• 2.5.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—DISA—Progress Tone
Continuation Time before Recording Message
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—OGM Record / Clear / Playback
• 2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—Queuing
Sequence—Sequence 01–16
• 2.11.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
– Floating Extension Number
– Delayed Ring
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM)

Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD
Group with Cellular Phone
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group

Overflow Feature
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
• 2.9.11 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature

Paging
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Group Paging
– Group Paging Answer
– Paging Deny Set / Cancel
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options
– Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
– Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
• 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only)
– Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
• 2.9.7 [3-4] Paging Group
• 2.9.8 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting

PC Programming Manual 827

3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.9.9 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6—Paging Deny
Feature Guide Reference
1.15.1 Paging

Parallelled Telephone
• 2.7.4 [1-1] Slot—Extension Card Property—APT/SLT Parallel Ring
• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
– XDP Mode (for S-Hybrid port)
– Parallel Telephone Ringing (for S-Hybrid port)
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set /
Cancel
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone

Password Security
• 2.1.2 Access Levels
• 2.4.10 Tool—Programmer Code Change
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—Password
Feature Guide Reference
2.3.3 Password Security

Pause Insertion
• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Pause Time
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Pause Time
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Pause Time
• 2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Pause Time
• 2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Pause Time
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
• 2.12.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion

PC Phone/PC Console
• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port
– DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
– DPT Type—Location No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
Feature Guide Reference
1.32.2 PC Phone/PC Console

PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN (MPR Software File Version
3.1000 or later)
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with
LCD (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

828 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO,
ICD Group, SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later))
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for SDN) (MPR Software File
Version 3.1000 or later)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO,
ICD Group, SDN (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later))
Feature Guide Reference
1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension

Portable Station (PS) Connection

• 2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station
Feature Guide Reference
1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection

Power Failure Transfer

• 2.17.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
Feature Guide Reference
2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer

Printing Message
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Printing Message
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing
Message 1–8
Feature Guide Reference
1.26.2 Printing Message

Privacy Release
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
Feature Guide Reference
1.14.1.3 Privacy Release

PC Programming Manual 829

3.2 Feature Programming References

PS Directory
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name
• 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
– Name
– CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
Feature Guide Reference
1.25.3 PS Directory

PS Ring Group
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—Distribution
Method
• 2.9.22 [3-9] PS Ring Group
• 2.9.23 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Feature Guide Reference
1.25.2 PS Ring Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

PT Programming
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Programming Mode
Level
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—Password
– System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level
– System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level
– Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
Feature Guide Reference
2.3.2 PT Programming

Queuing Feature
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue Monitor
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Transfer—Transfer to Busy Extension without BSS
Operation
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
– Overflow Queuing Busy
– Overflow No Answer
– Queuing Time Table
– Miscellaneous—Extension No Answer Redirection Time
– Miscellaneous—Maximum No. of Busy Extensions

830 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings—Call Waiting on VM Group

• 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings—Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature

Quick Dialling
• 2.8.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Feature Guide Reference
1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling

Reverse Circuit
• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Reverse Detection
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.5 Reverse Circuit

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

• 2.8.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 2.8.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
• 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan
1–8
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table
Feature Guide Reference
1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Room Status Control

• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Type
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge
– Main—Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
– Bill—Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest (Need MEC Card)
Feature Guide Reference
1.27.2 Room Status Control

PC Programming Manual 831

3.2 Feature Programming References

Software Upgrading
• 2.7.3 [1-1] Slot—MPR Card Property—Memory Version:
Feature Guide Reference
2.3.8 Software Upgrading

Special Carrier Access Code

• 2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code

Speed Dialling—Personal/System
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling
– Personal Speed Dialling - Programming
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level for System Speed
Dialling
• 2.10.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
• 2.12.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
• 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant—System Speed Dial
Feature Guide Reference
1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Analogue CO Call
Duration Start
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Outgoing CO Call Printout
(SMDR)
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge
– Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
– Charge—Charge Options—Currency
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main
– SMDR
– SMDR Options
– RS-232C
Feature Guide Reference
1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Supervisory Feature
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Incoming Call Queue Monitor
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
Supervisor Extension Number
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature

832 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

T1 Line Service
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
• 2.7.20 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port—Channel Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
only)
Feature Guide Reference
1.23.1 T1 Line Service

Tenant Service
• 2.8.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM
– PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
• 2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
• 2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
• 2.8.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
• 2.9.4 [3-2] User Group
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—Tenant Number
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—User Group
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—User Group
• 2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—Tenant Number
• 2.11.7 [5-5] External Sensor—Tenant No.
• 2.12.6 [6-6] Tenant
• 2.14 [8] ARS
• 2.14.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorisation Code for Tenant
• 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—Tenant Number
• 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table—Tenant Number
• 2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table—Main—Tenant Number
Feature Guide Reference
2.2.3 Tenant Service

Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Supplementary
Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS,
AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY
Feature Guide Reference
1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN

TIE Line Service

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—Trunk Property (for CO port)
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Network
Numbering Plan—Trunk Property (for CO port)
• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Trunk Property (for
TIE channel)

PC Programming Manual 833

3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Trunk Property

• 2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Trunk Property
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Receiving Dial Inter-digit Timer—TIE
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– TIE Line Access
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Private Network—Common Extension Numbering
for 2 PBXs (Optional SD Card Required)
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—COS
• 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table
• 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
– DIL—Trunk Property
– DIL—DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– DDI / DID / TIE / MSN
• 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table—DDI / DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.1 TIE Line Service

Time Service
• 2.8.5 [2-4] Week Table
• 2.8.7 [2-5] Holiday Table
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night)
Switch
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Time Service Switch
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic / Manual)
– Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
– Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
– Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
Feature Guide Reference
2.2.4 Time Service

834 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

Timed Reminder
• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
– Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
– Timed Reminder—Interval Time
– Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
– Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
• 2.8.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others—Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern
Plan 1–8
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—PT LCD—Time Display
• 2.11.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Timed Reminder Message - Day, Lunch,
Break, Night
• 2.12.9 [6-8] Hotel & Charge—Main—SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed
Reminder (Wake-up Call)
• 2.17.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR—Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Feature Guide Reference
1.28.4 Timed Reminder

Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
– TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
– TRS Level for System Speed Dialling
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
• 2.13.1 [7-1] Denied Code
• 2.13.2 [7-2] Exception Code
• 2.13.3 [7-3] Special Carrier Code
• 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
Feature Guide Reference
1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring)

Trunk Access
• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—Connection
• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Connection
• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Connection

PC Programming Manual 835

3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Connection

• 2.7.19 [1-1] Slot—T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Connection
• 2.7.25 [1-1] Slot—E1 Port—Connection
• 2.7.28 [1-1] Slot—E&M Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Connection
• 2.7.31 [1-1] Slot—DID Port—Connection
• 2.7.34 [1-1] Slot—IP-GW Port—Connection
• 2.7.38 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—
Connection
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
– Idle Line Access (Local Access)
– Trunk Group Access
– Single CO Line Access
• 2.8.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main—Line Hunting Order
• 2.9.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
– Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
• 2.14.1 [8-1] System Settings—ARS Mode
• 2.16.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings—CO Name
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.5.3 Trunk Access

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—TAFAS Answer
• 2.8.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
– Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
– Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only)
• 2.11.2 [5-2] External Pager
Feature Guide Reference
1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Trunk Busy Out

• 2.7.11 [1-1] Slot—LCO Port—Busy Out Status
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Busy Out Cancel

836 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Manager

• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO
Feature Guide Reference
1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out

Trunk Call Limitation

• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—Extension-CO Line Call Duration
Limit
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
• 2.9.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
– CO-CO Duration Time
– Extension-CO Duration Time
• 2.13.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
Feature Guide Reference
1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation

Verification Code Entry

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Extension PIN—Lock Counter
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote Operation / Walking COS /
Verification Code
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
– Option 2—ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3—Charge Limit
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
– Option 2—ARS Itemised Code
– Option 3—Charge Limit
• 2.12.3 [6-3] Verification Code
Feature Guide Reference
1.9.6 Verification Code Entry

VIP Call
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—VIP Call
Mode
Feature Guide Reference
1.2.2.5 VIP Call

Virtual Private Network (VPN)

• 2.7.14 [1-1] Slot—BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—Trunk Property (for CO port)
• 2.7.16 [1-1] Slot—PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Network
Numbering Plan—Trunk Property (for CO port)
• 2.14.2 [8-2] Leading Number—Leading Number
• 2.15.1 [9-1] TIE Table
– Leading Number
– Removed Number of Digits

PC Programming Manual 837

3.2 Feature Programming References

– Added Number
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Virtual PS
• 2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—Registration
Feature Guide Reference
1.25.6 Virtual PS

Voice Mail (VM) Group

• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—VM Unit No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—VM Port No. (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
• 2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
• 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
• 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
• 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Feature Guide Reference
1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Recall—Transfer Recall
• 2.9.16 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
• 2.9.17 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
– LCS Recording Mode
– LCS Answer Mode
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Extension No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—LCS Recording Mode
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)

838 PC Programming Manual

 3.2 Feature Programming References

– Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

• 2.11.1 [5-1] Doorphone—VM Trunk Group Number
• 2.16.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group
• 2.16.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group No.
• 2.16.6 [10-4] MSN Table—Main
– Tenant Number
– VM Trunk Group No.
Feature Guide Reference
1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Voice Mail DTMF Integration

• 2.8.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-
hook Wait Time
• 2.9.10 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
Programmed Mailbox No.
• 2.9.19 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
• 2.9.20 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.
• 2.10.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—Programmed Mailbox No.
• 2.10.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button
– Type
– Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Feature Guide Reference
1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

• 2.7.37 [1-1] Slot—IP-Extension Card Property—Common Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-
TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)—Gateway Address
• 2.8.21 [2-12] IP Extension Settings (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) (not
available for MPR Software File Version 3.1000 or later)—Gateway Address
Feature Guide Reference
1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network

PC Programming Manual 839

3.2 Feature Programming References

Walking COS
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—User Remote Operation / Walking COS /
Verification Code
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Remote Operation by
Other Extension
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
• 2.10.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
Feature Guide Reference
1.9.5 Walking COS

Walking Extension
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking Extension
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN
• 2.10.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Flexible Button—Pair Extension
Feature Guide Reference
1.28.3 Walking Extension

Whisper OHCA
• 2.8.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
– BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—OHCA / Whisper OHCA
• 2.8.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 5—Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx
Feature Guide Reference
1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

• 2.7.5 [1-1] Slot—Extension Port—DPT Type—Type (for DPT or S-Hybrid port)
• 2.7.45 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
• 2.8.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
• 2.8.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—Accept Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode Set by PS
• 2.10.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Wireless XDP
Feature Guide Reference
1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

840 PC Programming Manual

3.2 Feature Programming References

PC Programming Manual 841

Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.
1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan

Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use
only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
Communications Co., Ltd.

2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

PSQX3658WA KK0805ET3076